339
ViewBuilder Software Reference and PLC Connections Guide Version 2.5.1 For use with Touchscreen HMI models: PV-1040T PV-510T PV-1040S PV-508S PV-770S PV-508T PV-570T PV-506S PV-570S PV-570L DOC-IWS-637E Nematron Corporation 5840 Interface Drive Ann Arbor, MI 48103 Copyright © 2003-2004 Nematron Corporation

ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

  • Upload
    ngodiep

  • View
    229

  • Download
    2

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

ViewBuilder Software Reference and PLC Connections Guide

Version 2.5.1

For use with

Touchscreen HMI models:

PV-1040T PV-510T

PV-1040S PV-508S

PV-770S PV-508T

PV-570T PV-506S

PV-570S

PV-570L

DOC-IWS-637E

Nematron Corporation 5840 Interface Drive Ann Arbor, MI 48103

Copyright © 2003-2004 Nematron Corporation

Page 2: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)
Page 3: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Table of Contents Chapter 1: ViewBuilder Quickstart ...................................................................................................5

1.1 What You Will Need .............................................................................................................................6 1.1.1 Personal Computer.....................................................................................................................6 1.1.2 ViewBuilder Software ...............................................................................................................6 1.1.3 Download Cable ........................................................................................................................6 1.1.4 Power Supply.............................................................................................................................6

1.2 Installing ViewBuilder ..........................................................................................................................7 1.3 Using ViewManager..............................................................................................................................8 1.4 ViewBuilder Screen Editor Functions .................................................................................................10 1.5 Building a project ..............................................................................................................................13

1.5.1 What is a project? ....................................................................................................................13 1.5.2 Creating a new project .............................................................................................................13 1.5.3 Selecting the System Parameters .............................................................................................13 1.5.4 Create a new Window..............................................................................................................14 1.5.5 Design the window ..................................................................................................................17 1.5.6 Attaching libraries to the project..............................................................................................17 1.5.7 Edit the General Tab Attributes ...............................................................................................18 1.5.8 Place the Part ...........................................................................................................................19 1.5.9 Test the project.........................................................................................................................19

Chapter 2: Software Fundamentals .................................................................................................23 2.1 System Parameters ..............................................................................................................................24

2.1.1 The PLC Tab............................................................................................................................24 2.1.2 The General Tab ......................................................................................................................26 2.1.3 The Indicator Tab.....................................................................................................................28 2.1.4 The Security Tab......................................................................................................................29 2.1.5 The Editor Tab .........................................................................................................................30 2.1.6 The Hardware Tab ...................................................................................................................31

2.2 Window Operations.............................................................................................................................33 2.2.1 What is a Window?..................................................................................................................33 2.2.2 Creating a new Window ..........................................................................................................33 2.2.3 Window Selection Bar .............................................................................................................35 2.2.4 Opening Windows ...................................................................................................................36 2.2.5 Modifying Window properties.................................................................................................37 2.2.6 Deleting a Window ..................................................................................................................37 2.2.7 Adding parts to a Window .......................................................................................................37 2.2.8 Importing windows from other projects ..................................................................................38

2.3 Part Placement ..............................................................................................................................39 2.3.1 Part Placement Summary.........................................................................................................39

2.4 Library Operations ..............................................................................................................................57 2.4.1 What is a Library?....................................................................................................................57 2.4.2 Shape Libraries ........................................................................................................................57 2.4.3 Bitmap Libraries ......................................................................................................................59 2.4.4 Group Libraries........................................................................................................................62 2.4.5 Label Library ...........................................................................................................................65 2.4.6 Tag Library ..............................................................................................................................73

2.5 Macro Functions ..............................................................................................................................77 2.5.1 Add a Macro ............................................................................................................................78 2.5.2 Delete a Macro.........................................................................................................................78

1

Page 4: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.5.3 Edit a Macro ............................................................................................................................ 78 2.5.4 Using Copy/Paste to Create a Macro....................................................................................... 80 2.5.5 Macro Commands ................................................................................................................... 80 2.5.6 Sample Macros ........................................................................................................................ 89

2.6 Programming Task Buttons................................................................................................................. 92 2.6.1 What is a Task Button? ........................................................................................................... 92 2.6.2 Setting up Task Buttons .......................................................................................................... 92 2.6.3 Creating the Fast Selection Window ....................................................................................... 94

2.7 Simulation ............................................................................................................................. 96 2.7.1 What is ViewWindow? ........................................................................................................... 96 2.7.2 Troubleshooting Tools ............................................................................................................ 97 2.7.3 Programming Considerations ................................................................................................ 103

Chapter 3: Parts Reference Guide .................................................................................................104 3.1 List of Parts ........................................................................................................................... 105 3.2 Bit Lamp ........................................................................................................................... 107 3.3 Word Lamp ........................................................................................................................... 109 3.4 Set Bit ........................................................................................................................... 111 3.5 Set Word ........................................................................................................................... 114 3.6 Toggle Switch ........................................................................................................................... 118 3.7 Multi-State Switch ........................................................................................................................... 120 3.8 Function Key ........................................................................................................................... 122

3.8.1 Special Key Functions........................................................................................................... 122 3.8.2 Hard Copy (Print Function)................................................................................................... 123 3.8.3 Change Window.................................................................................................................... 124 3.8.4 Return to Previous ................................................................................................................. 125 3.8.5 Change Common Window .................................................................................................... 125 3.8.6 Pop-up Window..................................................................................................................... 125 3.8.7 Close Window ....................................................................................................................... 126 3.8.8 JOG FS-Window ................................................................................................................... 126 3.8.9 Window Bar .......................................................................................................................... 127 3.8.10 Minimize Window................................................................................................................. 127 3.8.11 Message Board ...................................................................................................................... 128

3.9 Numeric Input Extend ....................................................................................................................... 129 3.9.1 Invisible Keys and Pop-up Keypad Emulation ..................................................................... 130 3.9.2 Setting Numeric Display Format........................................................................................... 133 3.9.3 Font Alignment...................................................................................................................... 134

3.10 Numeric Data ........................................................................................................................... 136 3.11 ASCII Input Extend........................................................................................................................... 137 3.12 ASCII Data ........................................................................................................................... 139 3.13 Moving Shape ........................................................................................................................... 141 3.14 Animation ........................................................................................................................... 143 3.15 Indirect Window ........................................................................................................................... 145 3.16 Direct Window ........................................................................................................................... 147 3.17 Alarm Display ........................................................................................................................... 149 3.18 Trend Display ........................................................................................................................... 151 3.19 Bar Graph ........................................................................................................................... 155 3.20 Meter ........................................................................................................................... 157 3.21 Alarm Bar ........................................................................................................................... 159 3.22 Recipe Transfer ........................................................................................................................... 161 3.23 Event Display ........................................................................................................................... 164

2

Page 5: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.24 Data Transfer ............................................................................................................................167 3.25 Event Log ............................................................................................................................169 3.26 PLC Control ............................................................................................................................171 3.27 System Message ............................................................................................................................175 3.28 Alarm Scan ............................................................................................................................177 3.29 XY Plot ............................................................................................................................179

Chapter 4: Drawing .........................................................................................................................181 4.1 Line/Rectangle/Circle/Ellipse/Arc/Polygon ......................................................................................182 4.2 Text ............................................................................................................................185 4.3 Bitmap ............................................................................................................................186 4.4 Scale ............................................................................................................................187 4.5 Shape ............................................................................................................................188

Chapter 5: Development Environment Settings ...........................................................................189 5.1 Grid/Snap ............................................................................................................................190 5.2 Window Property setting ...................................................................................................................191 5.3 Language ............................................................................................................................193

Chapter 6: Editing Placed Objects.................................................................................................194 6.1 Moving and resizing objects..............................................................................................................195

6.1.1 Selecting objects ....................................................................................................................195 6.1.2 Nudging objects .....................................................................................................................195 6.1.3 Aligning objects .....................................................................................................................195 6.1.4 Scaling objects .......................................................................................................................195 6.1.5 Grouping and ungrouping objects..........................................................................................196 6.1.6 Flipping and rotating objects .................................................................................................196 6.1.7 Arranging objects...................................................................................................................196 6.1.8 Changing text size and alignment ..........................................................................................196 6.1.9 Cutting, copying and pasting objects .....................................................................................196 6.1.10 Undo ............................................................................................................................196 6.1.11 Redo ............................................................................................................................197

6.2 Editing Object Attributes...................................................................................................................198 6.2.1 Changing Attributes ...............................................................................................................198 6.2.2 Editing Stacked Objects.........................................................................................................198 6.2.3 Editing Grouped Object Attributes ........................................................................................198

6.3 Using the Window No. Treebar.........................................................................................................200 Chapter 7: Project Management and Documentation .................................................................202

7.1 Compressing and Decompressing a project.......................................................................................203 7.2 Decompiling a project .......................................................................................................................204 7.3 Converting a project to a Downloadable Binary ...............................................................................205 7.4 Documenting a project.......................................................................................................................207

7.4.1 Printing screens......................................................................................................................208 7.4.2 Printing object assignments ...................................................................................................208

Chapter 8: System Information......................................................................................................209 8.1 System Bit and Register Reference ...................................................................................................210

8.1.1 Local Memory........................................................................................................................210 8.1.2 Reserved Words/Bits .............................................................................................................211 8.1.3 System Parameter Mapping ...................................................................................................219

8.2 Communication Connections ............................................................................................................222 8.2.1 Connection to an External Device Pin Designations .............................................................222

3

Page 6: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.2.2 Connections to a Personal Computer .................................................................................... 223 8.2.3 Connections to a Printer ........................................................................................................ 224

8.3 HMI-to-HMI Connections for Masters/Slaves.................................................................................. 226 8.4 Ethernet Configuation ....................................................................................................................... 228 8.5 PLC Connections ........................................................................................................................... 229

8.5.1 Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (DF1)....................................................................................... 229 8.5.2 Allen-Bradley PLC5 (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol) ................................................................ 231 8.5.3 Allen-Bradley SLC DF1........................................................................................................ 233 8.5.4 Allen-Bradley SLC DH485 ................................................................................................... 235 8.5.5 Bristol Babcock (ControlWave) ............................................................................................ 238 8.5.6 Delta DVP ........................................................................................................................... 241 8.5.7 Facon FB ........................................................................................................................... 243 8.5.8 FUJI NB Series...................................................................................................................... 245 8.5.9 GE Fanuc Series 90 ............................................................................................................... 246 8.5.10 Hitachi EH-150...................................................................................................................... 248 8.5.11 IDEC Micro3......................................................................................................................... 250 8.5.12 Keyence ........................................................................................................................... 251 8.5.13 Koyo Direct ........................................................................................................................... 253 8.5.14 LG Glofa GM Cnet................................................................................................................ 256 8.5.15 LG Master K Cnet ................................................................................................................. 257 8.5.16 Matsushita FP1...................................................................................................................... 259 8.5.17 Mitsubishi AJ71C24.............................................................................................................. 261 8.5.18 Mitsubishi AnS...................................................................................................................... 262 8.5.19 Mitsubishi FX........................................................................................................................ 264 8.5.20 Mitsubishi J2-S100................................................................................................................ 265 8.5.21 Mitsubishi FX2n D (bit) ........................................................................................................ 268 8.5.22 Modicon Modbus .................................................................................................................. 270 8.5.23 Modbus RTU......................................................................................................................... 272 8.5.24 Modbus RTU Extend............................................................................................................. 275 8.5.25 Omron Host Link................................................................................................................... 278 8.5.26 Omron CQM1H-CPU61........................................................................................................ 280 8.5.27 Samsung SPC-10................................................................................................................... 282 8.5.28 Sharp JW Series..................................................................................................................... 283 8.5.29 Siemens S7-200..................................................................................................................... 285 8.5.30 Siemens S7-300 (w/HMI or PC Adaptor) ............................................................................. 286 8.5.31 Simatic TI505 ........................................................................................................................ 288 8.5.32 Telemecanique TSX37/07..................................................................................................... 291 8.5.33 Toshiba T Series.................................................................................................................... 292 8.5.34 VIGOR ........................................................................................................................... 294 8.5.35 Yokogawa PLC Series........................................................................................................... 295 8.5.36 Memory Map Protocol .......................................................................................................... 296 8.5.37 Hexadecimal Codes............................................................................................................... 299

8.6 ASCII Protocol Specification............................................................................................................ 301 8.6.1 Command List ....................................................................................................................... 301 8.6.2 Optional Parameters .............................................................................................................. 301 8.6.3 Network Support ................................................................................................................... 302 8.6.4 Command Usage ................................................................................................................... 303

8.7 PowerView Unit Error Messages...................................................................................................... 317

4

Page 7: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Chapter 1: ViewBuilder Quickstart

5

Page 8: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

1.1 What You Will Need This section lists the items needed to create, download, simulate and run an application on a PowerView or PowerView/E touchscreen HMI device using RS-232 communications.

1.1.1 Personal Computer

The minimum system requirements for installing and running ViewBuilder Software on a Personal Computer are:

Personal Computer using Pentium 100 or better microprocessor.

Microsoft™ Windows 95/98®, Windows NT® or Windows 2000® operating system.

Minimum of 32 MB of memory.

Hard drive with 10 MB of free space.

A monitor that supports Windows VGA or better.

Screen resolution should be set to 800x600.

A mouse that is compatible with Windows.

One RS-232 serial communications port.

NOTE: Be sure that the screen resolution of the PC on which you plan to develop programs is set to a minimum of 800x600 pixels. If a lower resolution is used, function buttons and other features will “drop off” the display screen!

1.1.2 ViewBuilder Software

The ViewBuilder software is required to create applications on a computer for the PowerView HMI.

1.1.3 Download Cable

To connect the PC to the PowerView and then the PowerView to the PLC, use cable CBL-PV1 (available from Nematron). Further information on cable configurations, see Installation and Operations Guide.

1.1.4 Power Supply

A 24 VDC power supply is required for the PowerView Touchscreen HMI units.

6

Page 9: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

1.2 Installing ViewBuilder To install the ViewBuilder software on your PC:

1. Unzip the ViewBuilder download file or insert the ViewBuilder install CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2. Open the Install folder on your desktop, then locate and double-click SETUP.EXE.

3. Follow the installation instructions on screen.

4. After the ViewBuilder installer finishes, you must restart your computer for the changes to take effect.

The installer will create a Nematron ViewBuilder program folder in your Start menu. To launch ViewBuilder, choose Start > Programs > ViewBuilder.

To uninstall ViewBuilder at any time, choose Start > Settings > Control Panel, click on the Add/Remove Programs icon and choose ViewBuilder.

7

Page 10: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

1.3 Using ViewManager ViewManager is a software shell program for the ViewBuilder screen editor used to program the Nematron PowerView series of HMI products. Once you have installed the ViewBuilder software, you can launch the ViewManager by selecting Start > Programs > ViewBuilder > ViewManager.

The following ViewManager screen items must be properly set up to facilitate communication between the PC and the PowerView unit:

COM Port: Select the COM port connected to the PowerView unit. Available choices are COM1 through COM10.

COM Speed: Select either 115200 bps or 38400 bps as the communication speed between the PC and the PowerView unit during download/upload operations.

Project Download/Upload or Recipe Download/Upload: This field determines which type of data is sent to or retrieved from the PowerView unit when the DownLoad or UpLoad commands are executed. Project Download/Upload will transfer all project related files, while Recipe Download/Upload will cause only Recipe files to be transferred on a DownLoad or UpLoad command

Complete or Partial Download/Upload: This field applies only when the Project Download/Upload option has been selected (see previous field). A “Complete” download will transfer project files and the application program to the PowerView unit, and is required for a first download or a new version download. A “Partial” download will transfer project files only.

The following control buttons are also available on the ViewManager screen for quick access to ViewBuilder functions:

ViewBuilder: Quick jump to the ViewBuilder screen design program.

Online-Simulator: Activates the online simulation mode. After a project has been compiled by ViewBuilder (creating a file with extension *.eob), the PC will retrieve data from the PLC through the PowerView unit and simulate the PowerView unit operations on the PC screen. Using the On-line

8

Page 11: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Simulator to debug a project will save you time by eliminating the need for repeated downloads. (For more information, see ViewWindow.)

Offline-Simulator: Activates the offline simulation mode. After a project has been compiled by ViewBuilder (file extension *.eob), the Simulator will simulate the operation of the PowerView unit on the PC screen using the PC as a mock PLC. Use the Off-line Simulator to create demonstration projects or to get an approximate view of how your windows will look in operation. (For more information, see ViewWindow.)

Download: Initiates a Download of the project or recipes compiled by ViewBuilder to the PowerView unit.

Upload: Initiates an Upload of the project image from PowerView to an object file (*.eob). The upload file cannot be opened by ViewBuilder but can be transferred to another PowerView unit. This is useful for retrieving data from installed units to create a duplicate set-up.

Each PowerView HMI unit can operate in one of three modes. Click the buttons described below to switch to the corresponding mode. It is not necessary to change Dip Switches on the unit for a mode change.

Jump to RDS (Remote Debug & Simulation) mode: Required for simulation and download/upload.

NOTE: Before using the Simulator, Download and/or Upload functions, the PowerView unit must be forced into RDS mode by clicking the Jump to RDS button.

Jump to Application (Online Operation) mode: This is the normal operating mode for a PowerView unit. When this button is clicked, the PowerView unit will display the start-up window of the currently downloaded project.

Jump to Touch Adjust (Touch Screen Calibration) mode: Used to calibrate the touch screen.

9

Page 12: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

1.4 ViewBuilder Screen Editor Functions To activate the ViewBuilder screen editor, click on the ViewBuilder icon or choose Start > Programs > ViewBuilder.You may also initiate the screen editor by clicking the ViewBuilder button on the ViewManager screen.

Once the ViewBuilder software has been activated, the following popup dialog appears.

Select the appropriate HMI model that you are programming and click OK.

The ViewBuilder edit screen will then be displayed. The functions of each screen area are explained below.

10

Page 13: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

a. Title Bar Displays the current project’s file name, window number and title.

b. Menu Bar Displays the menu used to select ViewBuilder commands. Selecting one of these icons causes the corresponding pull down menu to appear.

c. Tool Bar Displays the icons corresponding to the File, Edit, Library, Compile, Simulation and Download commands.

d. State selector Clicking on this button will toggle all the parts on the screen to a specified state.

e. Alignment Click here to align all selected parts to the top, bottom, left or right. (See Aligning Objects.)

f. Object resize Click here to force the dimensions of the selected parts (width or height) to the same size. (See Scaling Objects.)

g. Position adjust Use these buttons to adjust the position of all selected parts. (See Section 6: Nudging Objects.)

h. Group / ungroup The group function creates a collection of selected parts and/or drawing elements as one object. (See Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.)

i. Layer control Allows the Layer adjustment of a selected part. Parts may be moved one layer up, one layer down, to the top layer or to the bottom layer. (See Arranging Objects.)

j. Text size & position Click here to change the font size and alignment of the selected text. (See Changing Text Size and Alignment.)

k. Rotate and flip Allows selected shapes to be flipped horizontally or vertically and rotated in 90 degree increments. (See Flipping and Rotating Objects.)

l. Parts tool box This collection of icons represents all available part types. Click on a specific icon to bring up a specific part attribute dialog box. Part attributes can then be set and the part placed on the screen. (See Part Placement Summary.)

m. Window and object selection tree The Window No. Treebar provides a convenient way to select a specific window or object within a project. (See Using the Window No. Treebar.)

n. Drawing tool This collection of icons represents all available drawing tools. Drawing tools include line, rectangle, ellipse/circle, arc, polygon, scale, bit map graphics and shape. (See Drawing.)

11

Page 14: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

o. Cursor position Shows the current coordinate position of the cursor within the active window.

12

Page 15: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

1.5 Building a project

1.5.1 What is a project?

A project file (.epj ) is simply a collection of all the windows and window data used by an application.

1.5.2 Creating a new project

On the File menu, select New, then select the appropriate model from the pull down menu. This will cause a new project to be created. Select the model that you’re going to create an application for.

PV-1040T or PV-510T 10.4-inch Color TFT with 640 x 480 resolution

PV-1040S 10.4-inch Color DSTN with 640 x 480 resolution

PV-770S or PV-508S 7.7-inch Color DSTN with 640 x 480 resolution

PV-506T 5.7-inch Color TFT with 320 x 240 resolution

PV-570S or PV-506S 5.7-inch Color DSTN with 320 x 240 resolution

PV-570L 5.7-inch STN with 4-shade grayscale

1.5.3 Selecting the System Parameters

From the Edit menu, select System Parameters and the following screen will appear.

13

Page 16: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Within this screen are the following six tabs:

PLC: Set-up parameters for linking with a PLC.

General: System configuration for the project.

Indicator: Attributes of the system indicators.

Security: Allows the activation of security control.

Editor: General project characteristics.

Hardware: Used to configure units with certain hardware features.

For detailed explanations of each System Parameter tab, see System Parameters.

1.5.4 Create a new Window

To create a new Window:

1) From the Window menu select Open Window.

14

Page 17: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2) Click New Window.

3) Select the appropriate window style.

Base Window: Base Windows are normal windows displayed during PowerView unit runtime operation. They are used as informational or control screens that allow the operator to review and control a process. They may be called by a PLC Control or a Function Key. They can also be used with Indirect and Direct Window parts to appear on the screen as needed. The possible range of Base Window numbers is 10 to 1999.

NOTE: Base windows may be specified as smaller than full screen to facilitate a pop-up operation. These small windows, when popped up, will cover over the Common Window objects.

4) Setup the window properties as follows:

15

Page 18: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Name: Unique window name for identification purposes.

Window No: Assign a valid window number from 10 to 1999

Start Pos.: When this window is popped up by the function key with the “window pop-up” attribute, the upper left corner of the window will be displayed in this position.

Size: If the window is to be a partially sized popup, set the appropriate width and height. Set the window to full screen it the window is a Base window.

Style: Tracking, Monopoly, Clipping and Coherence

The Style parameters specify the relationship between a window and its calling window. If a window is marked as Monopoly then the calling window will be frozen when it is popped up. If a window is marked as Clipping then the calling window limits its boundary. This means the called window’s display area outside of the base calling window’s frame will be cut off. If a window is marked as Tracking, the window will be moved accordingly when its calling window is moved. If Clipping is selected, then Tracking must be selected as well. Coherance means that there can be no windows between the calling window and this window. One cannot be brought to the foreground without the other; both will be brought forward.

Security: This prevents unauthorized access to windows when the Security feature is activated and Security codes are assigned values other than 0

Underlay Window: UP to three windows can be specified as underlay windows. An underlay window adds its objects into the base window being created. Underlay windows attributes are ignored for this purpose. Limitation Note: Trend Displays cannot be on both an Underlay Window and a Normal Window.

Frame: A Frame is suggested for pop-up windows. The width of the frame can be selected from the drop down (0, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16). If the Frame is not set to 0, sixteen colors are available for the frame.

Background: Select the background color and pattern for the window.

16

Page 19: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

NOTE: The window number and size are not changeable after a window is created.

1.5.5 Design the window

By using parts and drawing elements, virtually any type of window display can be completed in ten minutes. “Easy to Use” is the greatest benefit of our ViewBuilder screen editor software.

For example, to add a Toggle Switch to your screen, simply click on the Toggle Switch icon , open a library and select an appropriate shape from the shape library.

NOTE: All parts that display a state change must be identified with a shape or bitmap library object. If a part is not associated with a library object, changes of state will not be visible!

1.5.6 Attaching libraries to the project

When adding a part that changes state, it’s necessary to associate that part with a shape or bitmap from an attached library. If a part is added to a screen without an associated shape or bitmap, the function will exist without an overlayed display. Labels may be added to a shape or bitmap, and can be made to vary depending on the state of the control.

You can get to the Library screen from either the Library toolbar option, or by checking the library option on the Shape tab for a specific part.

To attach a Library to a project, select Shape, BMP or Group Call up Library from the Library menu. ViewBuilder provides three types of libraries:

17

Page 20: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

A Bitmap graphics (BMP) is a collection of pixel of data. ViewBuilder supports up to 256 color bitmap graphics.

A Shape is a collection of drawing elements. When put together, this collection of elements will define a graphic symbol representing a button, lamp, function key, etc.

A Group is a collection of objects that are frequently used and function logically together as a group. (i.e. A keypad would be a group of function buttons.)

A comparison of Shape and Bitmap characteristics is illustrated below:

Bitmap Shape

Arbitrary graphic Good Limited to those graphics can be designed by basic drawing elements

Memory capacity Very large Small

Effect of enlarge & shrink

Fair to Bad Good

Display speed Good Good

The PowerView unit's 32-bit processor allows the display speed of both bitmap graphics and shapes to be extremely fast, even during enlarge and shrink operations.

NOTE: A maximum of 20 shape or bitmap libraries can be associated with a single project.

1.5.7 Edit the General Tab Attributes

Set-up the General attribute fields for your toggle switch, including device type and address:

18

Page 21: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

1.5.8 Place the Part

Once the part attributes have been set, click OK to place the part on the screen.

1.5.9 Test the project

1) The first step in testing a project is to save all project files.

From the File menu, select Save or click on icon to save the project.

19

Page 22: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Enter an appropriate File name and click Save.

2) Compile the project.

From the Tool menu, select Compile or click on to compile the project file and create a final run file (.eob ). Project files must be compiled before running any on-line or off-line simulations.

3) Simulate the project

After a project has been saved and compiled without errors, the On-line Simulator can be used to retrieve data from the PLC through the PowerView unit and simulate operation.

Before using On-Line Simulation, be sure to connect the PowerView unit and the PLC properly and set-up the COM port in the ViewManager menu.

20

Page 23: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

From the Tool menu, select Simulate or click on to begin the on-line simulation.

A project can also be simulated off-line by pressing the Off-line Simulation icon . Off-line simulation does not retrieve data from the PLC, but instead forces a static display of data on screen. Off-line simulation mode is useful for testing basic screen design and function prior to reading actual data.

By using the various Simulator modes to completely debug a project, the developer will save valuable time by avoiding repeated downloads to the PowerView unit. For more information on how Simulation works, see ViewWindow.

4) Download the project

To run your project from the PowerView unit as a live application, you must first download all necessary project files.

Before downloading, be sure to set the correct COM port in the ViewManager menu.

From the Tool menu, select On-line Simulation or click to load the image file into the PowerView unit.

5) Switch to Application Mode

To run your application, go back to ViewManager and click on Jump to Application. The PowerView unit will enter online operation mode and the start-up screen of your application will be displayed.

NOTE: If your project is completely developed and debugged, you may opt to load your finished program onto your PowerView unit(s) using the CompactFlash card slot rather than the download process described above. For more information, see “Converting a project to a Downloadable Binary” on page 205.

21

Page 24: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

If the PowerView unit screen has been programmed to access data from an invalid register or bit address for the PLC, the unit will receive an error message from the PLC. The unit interprets this as a loss in communications and will display an onscreen error message. Be sure that all data points registered in the window are valid for the connected PLC.

This ends the QuickStart section. From here it is up to you to make the spectacular screens that will make your operators effective.

22

Page 25: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Chapter 2: Software Fundamentals

23

Page 26: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.1 System Parameters Each ViewBuilder project is defined by a set of system parameters that control all aspects of the project, from specific PLC parameters to the color of the display screen. To edit the System Parameter screen, select System Parameters… from the Edit dropdown menu.

2.1.1 The PLC Tab

The PLC tab is used to set parameters for communication from the PLC unit to the associated HMI(s).

PLC type: Select the appropriate PLC type from the available PLC selection menu.

24

Page 27: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

HMI Model: Select the version of the PowerView HMI to which the created project will be downloaded.

PLC I/F: Select the type of communication the PLC port will be using, either RS-232 or RS-485. Once selected, the PowerView HMI will activate the corresponding port on the back of the unit.

Baud rate, Parity, Data bits and Stop bits: Set the communication parameter to match the selected PLC port settings.

Additional Parameters: Set the additional parameters as required by your driver. If additional parameters are needed, the labels will change to define each field’s purpose.

HMI station No.: This field is used to identify multiple PowerView HMIs connected to the same PLC link. For example, the use of the AB DH-485 or Unitelway drivers will allow the connection of multiple PowerViews to a single PLC. In the case of multiple connections, each PowerView HMI must be set to a unique station number. Set this field to 0 when not in use.

PLC station No.: Used when the PLC has a node or station number. Set this field to 0 when not in use.

Multiple HMI: Allows more than one PowerView unit to be connected to a PLC, even if the PLC has only one communication port. In theory there is no limit to the number of PowerView units on a chain. However, response time will gradually decrease when more than three PowerView units are linked together.

Disable : Disable chaining of multiple PowerViews to one PLC.

Master : Select this option when the PowerView is the unit connected directly to the PLC.

Slave : Select this option when the PowerView is connected to another PowerView unit in a chain.

HMI-HMI link speed: Set the appropriate communication speed between the master PowerView and slave PowerView.

Connect I/F: Select “Serial” or “Ethernet” as the HMI-HMI configuration.

Local IP Address: The IP address of the PowerView unit

Server IP Address: The IP address of the associated PLC.

Subnetwork Mask: Allows the masking of selected IP address fields.

Default Route IP Address: IP address of the associated Router, if necessary.

PLC timeout constant (sec): This setting determines how long the PowerView unit will wait for a response to requests sent to the PLC. Increase this setting to avoid the “No Response” system error message caused by slow controllers. The normal timeout constant is set at 3.0 seconds.

PLC block path: Used to determine how the PowerView unit will communicate to the controller. By increasing this number, larger blocks of registers can be fetched from the controller. In some cases this speeds the update of information on the display.

25

Page 28: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

NOTE: When creating a display, it is advisable to use consecutive registers whenever possible, facilitating a more efficient transfer of data in larger packets.

2.1.2 The General Tab

Task Button : The Task Buttons are used to pop up the fast display window or to hide/display the icon bar. Minimized window’s icons are displayed on the icon bar.

Attribute : Enables or disables the Task Buttons located along the bottom of the running display screen. If disabled, the fast window and task bar are not available at run time.

Position : Determines the position of the task buttons along the lower portion of the display screen.

Background color : Select the background color of the task bar.

Text : Determines if the text displayed within the minimized window icons is centered or left adjusted.

Alarm Ba n

Pixels32 pix

Scrollfaster

No. of wi

Startup w

26

Task

r : The alarm bar rotates all alarm ages one by one .

per scroll : Determines the numbels). The larger the number, the fa

speed : Sets the time interval to sthe alarm messages are displayed.

ndows : Set the number of window

indow No. : This is the number o

messTask

er of pixels of the alarm message to scroll ( 8, 1ster each alarm message is displayed.

croll between messages. The smaller the numbe

s that can be minimized to the task bar

f the window to be displayed on the screen at st

I

6, 24 or

r the

artup.

Page 29: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Backlight saver : Defines the amount of time, in minutes, that the PowerView will wait for touch operations to occur before turning off the back light. To disable the Backlight saver feature, set this field to 0.

Cursor color : Sets the color of the cursor when the Numerical Input is activated for data entry.

Buzzer : Used to disable or enable the buzzer operation. If enabled, the buzzer will activate when the touch screen is pressed.

Common Window : The Common window overlays the base window at all times.

Popup window : Sets the attribute of popup windows registered in the common window. Popup windows can be popped up as Normal (i.e. the latest pop up window is always displayed on the top) or Above any others to force the window to always display on the top.

Attribute : Sets the common window above or below the base window.

Extra. No. of Event : Default PowerView settings will accommodate up to 1000 events. If more than 1000 events are needed, the additional number of events would be entered here. For example, if 1200 total event messages are needed, the number 200 would be entered in the Extra No. of Event field.

RTC source : The PowerView unit comes with a built in real-time-clock (RTC), and includes the ability to transfer date and time information to any word-based Part through specific reserved addresses. RTC data can be retrieved from a Local Word or from the Internal RTC. If the data source is set to local word, then it is necessary to set another DF (Data Transfer ) object to periodically transfer actual RTC data from the PLC to the designated local word.

Print: Used to set printer protocols, and to enable the printing of time tag and sequence numbers when event messages are printed out.

Printer: Select the appropriate printer driver for your printer.

Print time tag: Enables the printing of the time with each event message.

Print date tag: Enables the printing of the date with each event message.

Extended time format: Sets the display of time tags to extended format H:M:S

Extended date format: Sets the display of date tags to extended format Y/M/D.

Print sequence number: This field enables the printing of a sequence number with each event message. The sequence number is incremented each time a new event comes up.

Error detection: Set this field to ignore error signals (such as no paper) from the printer, to display printer error messages, or to hold transmission of printed data until error signals are cleared.

Message board window No. (10, 0~1999): Enter the number of the base window used to display customized messages. Enter 0 to disable the Message Board feature.

27

Page 30: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.1.3 The Indicator Tab

The Indicator tab is used to set the characteristics of the three separate system indicators displayed along the bottom of the running application screen. These indicators are visible only if the Task Button bar has been activated from the System Parameters > General tab.

Touch Indicator : The circle within the touch indicator will change color when the HMI screen is touched. The color of the circle will vary depending on the specific area of the screen touched.

Attribute : Use this field to enable or disable the Touch Indicator. If disabled, the touch indicator will not be displayed on the task bar.

Non-configured area, Active area, Inactive area and Frame : Specific colors can be set for touch operations performed in each area of the screen.

CPU Indicator : The CPU Indicator provides a quick view of the current amount of CPU activity. The higher the color bar, the more activity and the higher the CPU usage.

Attribute : Use this field to enable or disable the CPU Indicator. If disabled, the CPU indicator will not be displayed on the task bar.

Color : Set the color of the CPU indicator.

Alarm Indicator : The alarm indicator displays a color bar representing the current number of active alarm messages. A full color indicator will display if the number of active alarms is above ten.

Attribute : Use this field to enable or disable the Alarm Indicator. If disabled, the Alarm indicator will not be displayed on the task bar.

Color : Set the color of the Alarm indicator.

28

Page 31: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.1.4 The Security Tab

ViewBuilder provides three levels of security, activated by checking the Security Control checkbox in the Set System Parameter dialog Security tab. By assigning passwords to one or more security levels, you are then able to set security for specific windows within the project.

Passwords

Each security level requires a password consisting of a double word value (0 to 999999999). Passwords are digits only, no characters are allowed. Security can be disabled for any level by setting the password to “0”, allowing access to all users.

Assign Window Security

Once security has been enabled, all base windows, with the exception of the initial screen (window 10), should have a security level assigned to them. The PowerView unit will automatically compare the login security level with the assigned window security level, restricting access if the user’s security level is not equal to or higher than the window-level security.

For details on how to set security at the Window level, see Modifying Window properties.

Local Word Usage

ViewBuilder provides several internal local words as placeholders for security information:

LW9040 (Write/Read, double word): Login address containing the last password value. Different levels can be activated by the user by changing the value in this register to a corresponding security password.

To read and/or change this password register, create a window with a numeric data entry object that accesses LW9040. In the Numeric Tab select the part to be displayed as “Mask“ with 9 digits above the decimal point, and a high limit of 999999999. Use an appropriate shape for the display. Be sure to provide a keypad in the window for data entry and a way to activate the Trigger bit. See Section x.xx: Numeric Input for more details about data entry objects.

You may also want to provide a way to force the level back to 0 when the secure operation is finished by adding a Set Word part that access LW9043 (see description below).

29

Page 32: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

LW9042 (Read only): Current security level (0, 1 or 2).

LW9043 (Write): Allows the user to switch the PowerView unit from a high security level to a lower level by entering a 0 or 1.

NOTE: Although the security level can be lowered by using LW9043, it cannot be changed to a higher level.

2.1.5 The Editor Tab

The Editor tab allows the programmer to change the following project characteristics.

Beginning window No.: Changes the window numbering system to begin with the number 1 instead of 10. Internally ViewBuilder will continue to maintain an Initial window of 10, but will display all window numbers with an offset to provide the appearance of beginning with window number 1.

Object In Compress: Compresses object information in order to reduce the amount of space required in the PowerView memory. This option requires extra DRAM to operate, and if selected it is suggested that the maximum number of windows in the General tab be reduced to 5 or less.

Compiler Level: This selection is used to determine the type of compile used. Because old projects did not have any checks for PLC address type, they must be compiled using Level 0. All new projects should be compiled using Level 1.

Part Layout: This selection determines what should happen when a Part's Device Address changes state, particularly when the Part is in a lower layer and possibly covered by another window or object.

30

Page 33: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Control: Make the part visible by moving it to the topmost layer(default).

Nature: Keep the part in its original layer, though partially or not visible.

Address Mode: This field enables the PowerView to connect to multiple PLCs with the Modbus RTU (485 2w), Modbus RTU Extend.pds, or CQM1h CPU61 pds by allowing Extended addressing.

Extended addressing:

3x:1#06 3x Station 1 Offset 6

4x:2#45 4x Station 2 Offset 45

3x:12#54 3x Station 12 Offset 54

Where the number before the “#” is the PLC station number (station number 0~255), and the number after the “#” is the register address.

Font: Click on the button to select the size and type of font displayed.

2.1.6 The Hardware Tab

The Hardware tab is used to set basic display and event log parameters.

LCD: The following two fields control screen display functions.

TFT PCD Value: Change this value to High if you experience “flickering” on the PowerView display.

31

Page 34: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Display Mode: Select Landscape(horizontal) or Portrait(vertical) mode as the screen orientation format.

Recipe:

EventLog DataBase: Select Yes to store the EventLog in memory.

DataBase Start Address: Enter the address of the beginning Recipe word at which the EventLog will be stored.

System Parameter: Select Yes to store System Parameter data (General, PLC, Security data), in memory. This allows the programmer to change values at runtime by writing new settings to the designated Recipe address using a standard object. All new values will be retrieved by the PLC on startup or reset.

32

Page 35: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.2 Window Operations

2.2.1 What is a Window?

“Windows” are the basic element of a ViewBuilder project. Each screen is composed of a number of “windows”. When the change screen command is executed, the screen is cleaned and the first window of the new screen is displayed. The contents of the common window will also be displayed on the screen. The pop-up windows invoked by direct or indirect window commands will not change the original content of screen, but will rather overlay the current screen.

Every new project begins with a default window, window number 10. Usually more than one window is needed for a project. There are three types of windows – Base, Fast Selection and Common. Valid window numbers are from 10 to 1999.

2.2.2 Creating a new Window

To create a new Window:

5) From the Window menu select Open Window.

6) Click New Window.

7) Select the appropriate window style.

33

Page 36: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Base Window: Base Windows are normal windows displayed during PowerView unit runtime operation. They are used as informational or control screens that allow the operator to review and control a process. They may be called by a PLC Control or a Function Key. They can also be used with Indirect and Direct Window parts to appear on the screen as needed. The possible range of Base Window numbers is 10 to 1999.

NOTE: Base windows may be specified as smaller than full screen to facilitate a pop-up operation. These small windows, when popped up, will cover over the Common Window objects.

Fast Selection Window: There can only be one Fast Selection Window and it must always be designated as window number 4. . It is activated by the View task button displayed along the lower portion of the screen. The size limit of the Fast Selection window is 10 to 200 Wide by 10 to 480 High.

Common Window: Common Windows are used as foregrounds or backgrounds to Base Windows. All controls on the acting Common Window are active. Also, any objects drawn or placed on the Common Window are visible when on top of the controlling Base Window. This saves memory by allowing the programmer to provide a common header or set of controls that are always active no matter which base screen is called. The default Common Window is 6. The Common Window can be changed by a Function Key. Base Window numbers 10 to 1999 can also be assigned as Common Windows. When called as a Common Window they become the new Common Window by replacing the default Common Window 6.

8) Setup the window properties as follows:

Name: Unique window name for identification purposes.

Window No: Assign a valid window number from 10 to 1999

Start Pos.: When this window is popped up by the function key with the “window pop-up” attribute, the upper left corner of the window will be displayed in this position.

Size: If the window is to be a partially sized popup, set the appropriate width and height. Set the window to full screen it the window is a Base window.

34

Page 37: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Style: Tracking, Monopoly, Clipping and Coherence

The Style parameters specify the relationship between a window and its calling window. If a window is marked as Monopoly then the calling window will be frozen when it is popped up. If a window is marked as Clipping then the calling window limits its boundary. This means the called window’s display area outside of the base calling window’s frame will be cut off. If a window is marked as Tracking, the window will be moved accordingly when its calling window is moved. If Clipping is selected, then Tracking must be selected as well. Coherance means that there can be no windows between the calling window and this window. One cannot be brought to the foreground without the other; both will be brought forward.

In the following example both window A and window B are registered in a Base window. In the normal case if you touch window A it will be positioned to the top. However, if window A is marked with the “coherence attribute, the window A will not be positioned to the top even when you touch it.

Base window

Window A

Window B

Window B

Base window

Window A

Security: This prevents unauthorized access to windows when the Security feature is activated and Security codes are assigned values other than 0

Underlay Window: UP to three windows can be specified as underlay windows. An underlay window adds its objects into the base window being created. Underlay windows attributes are ignored for this purpose. Limitation Note: Trend Displays cannot be on both an Underlay Window and a Normal Window.

Frame: A Frame is suggested for pop-up windows. The width of the frame can be selected from the drop down (0, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16). If the Frame is not set to 0, sixteen colors are available for the frame.

Background: Select the background color and pattern for the window.

NOTE: The window number and size are not changeable after a window is created.

2.2.3 Window Selection Bar

The ViewBuilder window selection bar lists all available windows, starting from window number 4,6,10 to 1999. Each window is denoted by its window number and name. An empty window is identified by a window number without a window name.

35

Page 38: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

You can select its number and use the right mouse button to show the associated menu. Choose Create to create a new window. You can open any existing window double-clicking on its name. If a start sign “* is shown before the window number, this means this window has been opened. To delete or close a window, click right button to pop-up a menu and chose “delete or “close operations.

To hide or display the window selection bar, select View > Window No. TreeBar, or use hot key “Tab” to toggle the status of window selection bar.

2.2.4 Opening Windows

Use the Open Window dialog to view the current list of windows associated with the project. Select the window you’d like to open from the list and double click, or simply click the Open button. Windows with an * mark displayed next to the window number are already opened.

To edit a window that has already been opened, open the Window menu and select the specific window from the displayed list.

36

Page 39: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.2.5 Modifying Window properties

From the Window menu, select Open Window. To edit the properties of a specific window, highlight the appropriate window and click the Setting button. The window properties dialog will be displayed, and can now be modified.

NOTE: The window number and size are not changeable after a window is created.

2.2.6 Deleting a Window

From the Window menu, select Open Window. Highlight the window to delete and click the Delete button.

2.2.7 Adding parts to a Window

Once a window has been opened and displayed, the programmer can draw shapes and add parts to the window. Use the Draw and Parts menu or toolbar icons to create the look and feel desired. Graphics drawn on the window do not respond to touch actions. Some parts do not react to touch actions. It is advised that each part be reviewed and understood before use. Going through the Parts Reference Guide in this manual will assist in this.

Drawing graphics

Simply click on the drawing tool or select the item from the Draw menu and drag the shape to size on the window. For a complete list of available shapes, see Drawing tools.

Once placed, the shape can be resized using its “handles. Handles are the highlighted squares that appear around the graphic when it is selected. An Attribute dialog to adjust color and fill characteristics is available by double-clicking the graphic or by clicking on the Edit tool.

37

Page 40: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Adding parts

Simply click on the Part tool or select the item from the Parts menu. Fill in the Attributes in the pop-up dialog and then place the Part on the window. Once placed, some Parts can be resized. The Attribute dialog can be recalled by double-clicking the Part or by clicking on the Edit tool.

2.2.8 Importing windows from other projects

Windows created in one project can be imported into another project. This is done through the Edit > Window Copy menu option. Select this menu item to pop-up the dialog box shown below.

Browse to the *.epj file containing the window you’d like to import. Fill in the Source Window number from the *.epj project. Select a window number in the open project where the imported window will be placed. If the Destination window already exists, the program will display a warning dialog that allows you to cancel the operation or continue. If you choose to continue, the old window will be overwritten with the new window data. Click OK to finish.

38

Page 41: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.3 Part Placement

2.3.1 Part Placement Summary

A screen is composed of a variety of parts such as Switches, Lamps, Numerical or Text Data and Graphics. The procedure to add a part to the screen requires only three simple steps.

Step 1: Select a Part

Select a Part by either clicking on a Parts toolbox icon, or by clicking on a specific part from the Parts drop-down menu.

Icon Toolbox Parts drop-down menu

For a complete list of Parts, see the Parts Reference Guide.

Step 2: Edit the Part Attributes

Once the Parts dialog box appears, enter all necessary attribute data, such as PLC read/write address, the Shape or Bitmap to be displayed onscreen, and the text label for the part.

39

Page 42: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

The General Tab

ID Numbers

An ID number is a code number assigned automatically to a Part, and is used to identify a specific part on the current screen. The programmer cannot change the ID number.

Attaching a Description

If desired, a description can be attached to each Part, providing a more comprehensive identification on project printouts.

40

Page 43: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Entering PLC read or write address

Valid device type and address range depends on the individual PLC type associated with the project. Once the appropriate PLC type has been chosen in the PLC tab of the System Parameters window, the device type dropdown will display all valid options.

LB (Local Bit) and LW (Local Word) are the designations for internal bits and words within ViewBuilder. The range for general use is 0 to 8999. Bits and words from 9000 to 9999 are reserved for system use as described in Section 8.1.1.

RB bits and RW words are internal recipe memory options. RBI and RWI are the indexes to recipe memory locations. See Section 8.1.2 for further details.

Ms_RB, Ms_RW, Ms_LW and Ms_LB are bits and words located in the Master PowerView unit when Master/Slave configurations are used.

NOTE: If you have defined any tags (aliases) for the given address type, you can choose to assign one of them to the part rather than enter a direct address. For more information, see “The Label Library is a library of reusable label templates that can be accessed by any part on any window in the project. This not only eliminates the hassle of repeatedly entering the same label information for similar parts, it also ensures that any change made to a label in the library will automatically apply to every part given that label.

Furthermore, a "label" in the Label Library is actually a multi-state, multi-language matrix of labels. The label on a part can change dynamically according to the current state of that part, and all of the labels in the project can be changed at once according to a global Language parameter. In total, each label in the Label Library can have 132 possible values: up to 32 states per label and up to four different languages per state.

41

Page 44: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Adding and deleting label templates

To add a new label template to the Label Library:

1) Open the Label Library window by selecting Library > Label from the main menu bar.

2) Click Add. A new Label dialog will appear.

3) Enter the Label Name for the label template and the Number of States (up to 32) for which the template will be valid. EXAMPLE: A template named 'Pet' with two valid states.

42

Page 45: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4) Click OK to save the label template and close the dialog. The new template will be listed in the Label Library window.

5) With the new label template selected, click Modify. The Label Content Setting dialog for the selected template will appear.

43

Page 46: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

6) For each valid state of the label template, you can enter up to four different language variants. EXAMPLE: On the label template 'Pet', for state 0, the four variants are 'Cat', 'Gato', 'Katze', and 'Neko'.

Language is a global parameter stored at LW9130. Changing the parameter to any of its four settings (0 through 3) forces all Label Library templates used in the project to change to their corresponding variants. For more information, see Changing labels by language.

7) Select the next state (if any) from the State No. pull-down menu.

44

Page 47: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8) Enter the language variants for the state. EXAMPLE: On the label template 'Pet', for state 1, the four variants are 'Dog', 'Cao', 'Hund', and 'Inu'.

Now when this label template is applied to a multi-state part such as a Lamp or Switch, the label displayed will change according to the current state of the part. Please note that this change between states is independent of any change between languages.

9) Click OK to save the label template and close the dialog. The new template will be listed in the Tag Library window and can be assigned to parts.

To modify an existing label template, select it in the Label Library window and click Modify. A Label Content Setting dialog for the template will appear, in which you can change any attribute of the template (steps 6 through 9 above). All changes – including label name – are automatically reflected on any objects to which the template has been assigned.

To delete an existing label template, select it in the Label Library and click Delete.

To save all of your changes and exit from the Label Library, click Exit.

45

Page 48: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Assigning a label template to a part

To assign a label template to a part:

1) Create a new part or open an existing part. The configuration dialog for that part will appear. EXAMPLE: A multistate switch.

2) Select the Label tab.

46

Page 49: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3) Select (check) the Use Label Library checkbox.

Note: When you choose to use the Label Library, the Content text field on the part’s Label tab becomes disabled. This is to show that you cannot directly edit labels drawn from the Label Library. However, you can still change the label's color, font size, and alignment.

4) The first available label template is automatically assigned to the part. To change the template, select one from the Label Index pull-down menu.

5) Finish configuring the part as needed.

Tip: If the label template you want to select is not listed in the Label Index pull-down menu, or if the template you select needs to be corrected, you can click the Label Library button to go directly to the Label Library window and add or modify templates as needed.

47

Page 50: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Changing labels by language

Every state of every label template in the Label Library can have up to four different language variants. When the value of the global Language parameter (LW9130) is changed, every label template used in the project is changed to the corresponding variant. The Language parameter can have a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3.

Note: This change between languages is independent of any change between states on individual parts.

To change the Language parameter during development, select a new language from the Language pull-down menu in the upper-right corner of the ViewBuilder application window:

This is useful for seeing how the different label variants will appear on your HMI screens.

To change the Language parameter during runtime, you must add an appropriate part – such as a Set Word or Multistate Switch – to your project and link it to device address LW9130:

48

Page 51: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Tip: You may also create a tag (alias) for the Language parameter and link the part to it rather than directly to device address LW9130:

Once the part is linked to the correct device address, finish configuring it as needed.

49

Page 52: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Tag Library” on page 65.

Entering Bit Addresses

Bits are usually entered as the bit word followed by the bit number. When entering bit numbers, delimiters such as a space and “/” are ignored. For example, bit 11 of Input card 3 would be entered as “311” (or 3 11, 3.11, or 3/11). In some cases a hexadecimal notation is required (3A). Reference Section 8.1.2 for details on bit format for your particular controller.

Extended Address Mode

When more than one unit is connected to multiple PLCs of the same kind. (Available for some RS-485 models listed with the 485 2W suffix.

Example: Modbus RTU (485 2W)

3x:1#06 = 3x, PLC 1, Offset 6

4x:2#45 = 4x, PLC 2, Offset 45

3x:12#54 = 3x, PLC 12, Offset 54

The addressing method is as follows:

Device type followed by the PLC ID number, a “#”, then the word or bit number.

The Shape Tab

When adding a part to a project screen, it’s necessary in most cases to associate a visual graphic with that part. By doing this you provide a visual indication of where the part is physically located on the screen, as well as a graphic representation of any state changes the part may experience.

For your convenience, the ViewBuilder software includes a variety of shape and bitmap libraries containing a variety of part shapes.

Selecting a Shape or Bitmap

1) Click on the Shape tab.

2) Select either the Use shape or Use Bitmap checkbox.

3) Click on the Shape Library or Bitmap Library button.

Once a library type has been chosen, the Shape or Bitmap browser will pop up. Shapes are stored in specified shape libraries (.slb file) and the Bitmaps in bitmap libraries (.blb). A maximum of 20 shape libraries can be attached to a project. By calling up different shape libraries, useful shapes for almost any application can be found. Users can also build their own shape libraries.

50

Page 53: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Selecting a Shape from a Library

Background Allows the background field of the library objects to be changed. This is used to see how a window’s background color effects the way a shape appears. The background color of the shape object in the library does not follow the shape once it is placed in the window.

51

Page 54: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Frame Used when viewing SYS_XXX libraries to uniformly change the color of all buttons in the library. This has no effect on other libraries.

Select Lib Attach an existing library to the current project.

New Lib Attach a new (blank) library to current project.

Unattach Lib Use this button to remove a library from the current project. Objects that use shapes from the deleted library will be displayed as rectangle outlines. No warning is given when you unattach a Library that contains shapes used in the current project, so be sure you want to perform this operation!

Delete shape Delete all the shapes from the selected cell. The result of this operation is a completely empty cell. If you want to delete only one shape out of a cell, place all of the cell’s shapes on a screen and delete the cell. Then put back into the empty cell the shapes you want to keep.

Place Place the shape on the current window as a group of drawn objects. This is useful for editing a shape’s color or using an existing shape as a base for a new shape.

Selecting a Bitmap from a library

1) Click on the Shape tab.

2) Select the Use BMP checkbox.

3) Click BMP Library and the BMP browser will pop up. All BMP graphics are stored in specified BMP library files (.BLB file). Each project can include up to 10 BMP libraries. By calling up different BMP libraries, a useful BMP for almost any application can be found. Users can also build up their own bitmap libraries.

52

Page 55: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Background Allows the background field of the library objects to be changed. This is used to see how a window’s background color effects the way a bitmap appears. The background color of the bitmap in the library does not follow the bitmap once it is placed in the window.

Frame Used when viewing SYS_XXX libraries to uniformly change the color of all buttons in the library. This has no effect on other libraries.

Select Lib Attach an existing library to the current project.

New Lib Attach a new (blank) library to the current project.

Add bitmap Add a BMP graphic to the specified cell.

Delete bitmap Delete BMP graphics from the selected cell. The result of this operation is a completely empty cell.

Export Save the Bitmap to a file with *.bmp format. This is useful for editing BMPs with a graphic editing program.

CAUTION: The PowerView HMI unit currently allows a project download of up to 1 MB. If a compiled project file becomes too large to download, the PowerView unit will display the following error message:

“Erase Image Fail”

One effective method for decreasing the size of a project is to compress all associated bitmaps. To do this, open the bitmap library and click the Compressed checkbox under each of the bitmaps included in the project. This will reduce individual image size, and subsequently the compiled project size.

53

Page 56: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

The Label Tab

Adding a label to a part

A label refers to the text characters shown on the face of the Switch, Lamp or other object (Parts).

1) Click on the Label tab.

Select Attributes for the part.

Color: A maximum of 256 colors are available for selection. The “basic palette” includes the most commonly used colors. The “customized palette” allows the selection of customized colors.

Font: A variety of font sizes are available – 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 72 and 96

Alignment (Justification): When the text input for a Label fills more than two lines, the text alignment can be defined as left, right or center justified.

54

Page 57: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

State: States are displayed only for those parts with multiple states. ViewBuilder allows unique text to be displayed for each state. First select the state, and then set the text, font, color and alignment for the text to be displayed when the selected state is active.

Type the label text in the Content field. The Enter key can be used to move to the next line if desired.

2) Select the Use Label checkbox.

3) If desired, select the Tracking checkbox to place labels of different states in the same spot.

Once the Part is placed on the screen, the Label can be moved anywhere within the boundary of the object. Just click on the label and drag the mouse to move it to the desired position. Toggle through the state designator to display the predefined label in each state.

NOTE: If you have defined any labels in the Label Library, you can choose to assign one of them to the part rather than manually enter a label. For more information, see “

55

Page 58: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Label Library” on page 65.

Step 3: Place the Part

Once the attributes have been set as desired, click the OK button to place the new object on the screen. The object will be shown in the upper left corner of the editing window. The object can then be dragged into position and resized as desired.

Bit Lamp

56

Page 59: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.4 Library Operations

2.4.1 What is a Library?

Libraries are files that contain a collection of bitmaps, shapes and groups that can be applied to the project being developed.

2.4.2 Shape Libraries

A Shape library is a file with extension (.slb) that contains a selection of graphic shape objects. The ViewBuilder software package includes several shape libraries, and also provides the capability to build your own shape libraries.

On Library menu, select Shape > Call up Library. The Shape Library dialog will appear.

Creating a Shape Library

Click on the New Lib… button. A dialog box for entering a file name appears. Enter the name of the shape library to be created.

NOTE: All shape libraries are automatically assigned the *.slb extension.

Opening a Shape Library

Click on the Select Lib… button. A standard dialog box for selecting a file appears. Select the name of the shape library to be opened.

57

Page 60: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Adding a shape to a Shape Library

1) Open a window and draw the shape graphics by using the drawing tools in the ViewBuilder program. For example, the following graphic was created using the line and rectangle tools and by layering parts into a graphically pleasing button.

2) Select the whole graphics by using the arrow tool to drag a rectangle around it. White handles should appear on all of the selected objects.

3) On the library menu select Shape Save to library.

4) Select the Shape library to which the shape will be added.

5) Select the Shape No. (The Shape No. is the shape’s cell in the library.)

6) Click OK to save the graphic to the shape library.

NOTE: State No. is is automatically set to the first empty location.

58

Page 61: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.4.3 Bitmap Libraries

A bitmap library is a file that contains a selection of bitmap objects. The ViewBuilder software package includes several bitmap libraries, and also provides the capability to build your own bitmap libraries.

In addition to our current bitmap graphic libraries, ViewBuilder now includes a subset of the Symbol Factory 2.0 bitmap graphic set. Subset libraries are organized by part type, and represent a significant increase in the number of part graphics available for screen design. Symbol Factory libraries include the following:

Switches

Indicator lamps

Meters

Pipes

Pumps

Motors

Valves

Tanks

Machines

Etc… On the Library menu select Bitmap Call up Library. The Bitmap Library dialog box will appear on the screen.

59

Page 62: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Opening a Bitmap Library

To open an existing Bitmap library, click on the Select Lib… button. A standard dialog box for selecting a file appears. Select the name of the bitmap library to be opened. Once a bitmap library has been opened, all bitmaps within that library are available to be added to any window in the current project.

Creating a Bitmap Library

To create a new bitmap library, click on the New Lib… button. A dialog box for entering a file name appears. Enter the name of the bitmap library to be created.

NOTE: All bitmap libraries are automatically assigned the *.blb extension.

Adding a bitmap to a Bitmap Library

If you’ve created a new bitmap, or you’d like to use a bitmap not currently available, you’ll need to add the bitmap to a valid project library.

1) Select the library you wish to add the bitmap to from the Bitmap Library dropdown list.

2) Click on the Add Bitmap… button and the following dialog box pops up.

Bitmap No.: Select the number by which the bitmap will be identified on the bitmap selection screen. The dropdown will automatically default to the next available slot.

Bitmap name: Enter up to 8 characters defining the bitmap.

Total states: Enter the total number of states the bitmap is to have. If the bitmap is defined as having multiple states, a separate bitmap for each specific state must be assigned.

3. Click Next to proceed to the Set Bitmap Graphics dialog box.

60

Page 63: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4. Enter the path to the new BMP file or click the Browse button to select using the standard file selection dialog. The graphic importer will guide you through each step to get the BMP graphic installed. Please note that the displayed preview of the bitmap may seem distorted due to the process of sizing the file to fit the dialog box. However, when the bitmap is placed on the screen it will display in proper proportions.

3) Click on Finished when the final state selection bitmap is complete. The graphic importer will guide you through each state to get and install BMP graphics. The Back button can be used to review all entered bitmaps.

TIP: One color of the bitmap can be selected as transparent. This is useful for eliminating background colors. To make a color transparent, simply select the Transparent check mark and then click anywhere in the area to be made transparent.

61

Page 64: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.4.4 Group Libraries

Group Libraries enable multiple objects to be combined and saved, and then called up whenever necessary. The Group objects saved in these libraries can be viewed and selected using the Browser function. Since groups of objects may include parts that refer to Shape or Bitmap graphics, the related shape libraries and Bitmap libraries must also be attached to the project before calling up group objects.

From the Library menu, select Group Call up Library. The Group Library dialog box will appear on the screen.

Library name: Select the group library from the list.

Including library: Specifies the related Shape and Bitmap libraries for that group of objects. If the related Shape and Bitmap libraries are not included with the project, the group objects will be displayed as boundaries of shapes or bitmaps. To correct this, go to the Shape and Bitmap libraries dialog boxes and open the required libraries.

Select Lib: The library browser will appear. Select an existing group library. After the library is selected you can view the contents of the library by selecting the library name.

New Lib: Create a new group library

Place: Select the group objects and place it on the screen.

62

Page 65: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Creating a Group Library

To create a new Group Library, click on the New Lib… button. A dialog box for entering a file name appears.

Enter the name of the group library to be created.

NOTE: All group libraries are automatically assigned the *.glb extension.

Opening a Group Library

Click on the Select Lib… Button. A standard dialog box for selecting a file appears. Select the name of the Group Library to be opened.

63

Page 66: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Adding a group to a Group Library

1) Open a window and draw the graphics by using the drawing tools. Also add any parts to the window such as lamps, function keys, etc.

The programmer can take an existing group object, ungroup it and modify the group into a new group. For example, the group shown below uses shapes, numeric parts and rectangle tools.

2) Use to select all the candidate objects on the screen.

3) From the Library menu, select Group Save to library.

4) Select the appropriate Group library, fill in the Description and Group No., and click OK to save all the selected objects as a new group object in the library.

64

Page 67: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.4.5 Label Library

The Label Library is a library of reusable label templates that can be accessed by any part on any window in the project. This not only eliminates the hassle of repeatedly entering the same label information for similar parts, it also ensures that any change made to a label in the library will automatically apply to every part given that label.

Furthermore, a "label" in the Label Library is actually a multi-state, multi-language matrix of labels. The label on a part can change dynamically according to the current state of that part, and all of the labels in the project can be changed at once according to a global Language parameter. In total, each label in the Label Library can have 132 possible values: up to 32 states per label and up to four different languages per state.

Adding and deleting label templates

To add a new label template to the Label Library:

10) Open the Label Library window by selecting Library > Label from the main menu bar.

11) Click Add. A new Label dialog will appear.

65

Page 68: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

12) Enter the Label Name for the label template and the Number of States (up to 32) for which the template will be valid. EXAMPLE: A template named 'Pet' with two valid states.

13) Click OK to save the label template and close the dialog. The new template will be listed in the Label Library window.

14) With the new label template selected, click Modify. The Label Content Setting dialog for the selected template will appear.

66

Page 69: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

15) For each valid state of the label template, you can enter up to four different language variants. EXAMPLE: On the label template 'Pet', for state 0, the four variants are 'Cat', 'Gato', 'Katze', and 'Neko'.

Language is a global parameter stored at LW9130. Changing the parameter to any of its four settings (0 through 3) forces all Label Library templates used in the project to change to their corresponding variants. For more information, see Changing labels by language.

16) Select the next state (if any) from the State No. pull-down menu.

67

Page 70: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

17) Enter the language variants for the state. EXAMPLE: On the label template 'Pet', for state 1, the four variants are 'Dog', 'Cao', 'Hund', and 'Inu'.

Now when this label template is applied to a multi-state part such as a Lamp or Switch, the label displayed will change according to the current state of the part. Please note that this change between states is independent of any change between languages.

18) Click OK to save the label template and close the dialog. The new template will be listed in the Tag Library window and can be assigned to parts.

To modify an existing label template, select it in the Label Library window and click Modify. A Label Content Setting dialog for the template will appear, in which you can change any attribute of the template (steps 6 through 9 above). All changes – including label name – are automatically reflected on any objects to which the template has been assigned.

To delete an existing label template, select it in the Label Library and click Delete.

To save all of your changes and exit from the Label Library, click Exit.

68

Page 71: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Assigning a label template to a part

To assign a label template to a part:

6) Create a new part or open an existing part. The configuration dialog for that part will appear. EXAMPLE: A multistate switch.

7) Select the Label tab.

69

Page 72: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8) Select (check) the Use Label Library checkbox.

Note: When you choose to use the Label Library, the Content text field on the part’s Label tab becomes disabled. This is to show that you cannot directly edit labels drawn from the Label Library. However, you can still change the label's color, font size, and alignment.

9) The first available label template is automatically assigned to the part. To change the template, select one from the Label Index pull-down menu.

10) Finish configuring the part as needed.

Tip: If the label template you want to select is not listed in the Label Index pull-down menu, or if the template you select needs to be corrected, you can click the Label Library button to go directly to the Label Library window and add or modify templates as needed.

70

Page 73: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Changing labels by language

Every state of every label template in the Label Library can have up to four different language variants. When the value of the global Language parameter (LW9130) is changed, every label template used in the project is changed to the corresponding variant. The Language parameter can have a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3.

Note: This change between languages is independent of any change between states on individual parts.

To change the Language parameter during development, select a new language from the Language pull-down menu in the upper-right corner of the ViewBuilder application window:

This is useful for seeing how the different label variants will appear on your HMI screens.

To change the Language parameter during runtime, you must add an appropriate part – such as a Set Word or Multistate Switch – to your project and link it to device address LW9130:

71

Page 74: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Tip: You may also create a tag (alias) for the Language parameter and link the part to it rather than directly to device address LW9130:

Once the part is linked to the correct device address, finish configuring it as needed.

72

Page 75: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.4.6 Tag Library

The Tag Library is a library of user-defined, "plain English" tags (aliases) for device addresses. These aliases can be used instead of direct addresses when configuring parts. The same tag can be referenced by an unlimited number of parts, and when the tag is modified in any way, every part is automatically updated.

Adding and deleting tags

To add a new tag (alias) to the Tag Library:

1) Open the Tag Library window by selecting Library > Tag from the main menu bar.

2) Click Add. A new Tag dialog will appear.

3) Enter the Tag Name you want to give to the device address.

73

Page 76: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4) Select the Address Type (Bit or Word) and Device Type, then enter the specific device Address. EXAMPLE: A tag named 'Language' created for address type 'Word' and device address 'LW 9130'.

5) Click OK to save the tag and close the dialog. The new tag will be listed in the Tag Library window and can be assigned to parts of the appropriate type (Bit or Word).

To modify an existing tag, select it in the Tag Library window and click Modify. A Tag dialog for the tag will appear, in which you can change any attribute of the tag (steps 3 through 5 above). All changes – including tag name – are automatically reflected on any objects to which the tag has been assigned.

To delete an existing tag, select it in the Tag Library and click Delete.

CAUTION: If you delete a tag that has already been assigned to parts, those parts will revert to their default ("zero") addresses. However, if you recreate the tag with the same tag name, those parts will automatically relink to the tag.

To save all of your changes and exit from the Tag Library, click Exit.

74

Page 77: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Assigning a tag to a part

To assign a tag (alias) to a part:

11) Create a new part or open an existing part. The configuration dialog for that part will appear.

12) In the Read and/or Write Address pane (varies by part), select (check) the Tag checkbox to switch from direct addressing to tag selection.

NOTE: If the Tag checkbox is not available, it is because you have not yet created any tags of the appropriate type (Bit or Word).

75

Page 78: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

13) Select the desired tag from the Device type pull-down menu.

14) Finish configuring the part as needed.

TIP: To switch a part from tag selection back to direct addressing, simply deselect (uncheck) the Tag checkbox. The part will revert to its default ("zero") address.

76

Page 79: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.5 Macro Functions A macro is a set of commands written in a simple programming language designed to perform one or more functions when triggered. Macros can be attached to a standard PLC Control Object and will allow the processing of more precise tasks such as turning bits off and on. Macros can also be used to read PLC registers, perform logical or mathematical operations, and set variables (local or global).

To access all macro functions, open the Macro dialog box by selecting Tools > Macro:

The displayed list represents the macros currently available to the project. Macros in the Not-Download Macro list contain compile errors and must be corrected before use.

77

Page 80: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.5.1 Add a Macro

To add a new macro to the project, click the Add button from the Tools > Macro dialog. The Macro Workspace dialog will appear:

The macro Workspace dialog allows the programmer to create a custom macro script, or edit an existing script. When adding a new macro, the following fields must be defined:

Macro ID: Numeric ID used to identify the macro. This field will default to the next available ID number, but can be edited.

Macro Name: Descriptive name of the macro, identifying the function performed.

Macro commands are inserted between the Macro_Command main ( ) and End Macro_Command lines. For further details on how to use the Workspace dialog, see Edit a Macro.

2.5.2 Delete a Macro

To delete an existing macro, highlight the name of the macro on the Tools > Macro dialog and click the Delete button.

Important: The delete function is performed immediately, causing the selected macro to be removed from the system without additional warning!

2.5.3 Edit a Macro

To View / Edit the source code for a specific Macro, highlight the appropriate macro in the list and click the Edit button. The macro Workspace dialog will appear:

78

Page 81: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Macro code is displayed in the center edit box, and can be viewed by scrolling down with the right scroll bar.

PLC Communication:

Compile: When all source code editing has been completed, click the Compile button to check and process the code. If any compile errors are found, the associated error messages are displayed in the lower text box and the macro will be placed in the Not-Download Macro list.

79

Page 82: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.5.4 Using Copy/Paste to Create a Macro

The Copy and Paste buttons are used to quickly create new macros based on existing source code. Highlight the macro you’d like to copy and click the Copy button. Click Paste to add the copied macro to the macro file list. Note that the copied macro will have the same name as the original followed by a numeric ID.

To edit the newly created macro, highlight it and click the Edit button. The new macro will display in the Macro Workspace dialog, allowing changes to be made to the name and source code.

2.5.5 Macro Commands

Macros are made up of constants, variables, and command statements. In general, the size of a macro is limited only by storage capacity on the running machine. However, a maximum of up to 256 macros may be compiled and saved to a project’s .eob file. The maximum storage space for local variables in a macro is 4k bytes. Because of data transfer processing, the execution of a macro may slow down when communicating with a PLC.

Constants and Variables

Constants are defined as one of the following: Decimals

Hexadecimals ASCII code (character) Boolean (True-Not Zero, False-Zero)

Variables can be alpha numeric (contain characters and numbers), but they must start with an alphabet character. The length of a variable name may not exceed 32 characters.

Variables must be defined, or “declared”, at the beginning of a macro using one of the following types:

(char) Character (int) Integer variable (32 bit) (short) Short integer variable (16 bit) (float) Floating point variable (bool) Boolean variable

Example: Macro_Command main( ) Int h the variable “h” is declared as an integer

Variable values may be initialized in one of two ways:

(1) Direct declaration statement – Example:

80

Page 83: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Macro_Command main( ) int h=9 where the variable h is simultaneously defined as an integer (int) with a value of “9”

(2) Use of an assignment operator to initialize after the value has been declared – Example:

Int h h=9

Operators = Assignment + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication

/ Division mod, Modulo < Less than <= Less than or equal to > Greater than >= Greater than or equal to == Equal <> Not Equal And Conditional AND Or Conditional OR Xor Exclusive OR Not Boolean NOT << Left bitwise shift >> Right bitwise shift & Bitwise AND | Bitwise OR ^ Bitwise XOR ~ Bitwise Complement The order in which operators are processed within an expression is as follows:

81

Page 84: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

(1) Operators of the same type within an expression are processed left to right. (2) Arithmetic operators are processed in the following order: (^) (*,/) (mod) (+,-) (3) Shift operators are processed from left to right within an expression. (4) Comparison operators are processed from left to right within an expression. (5) Logic operators are processed in the following order: (Not), (And), (Or), (Xor) In general: Arithmetic operators are processed prior to Bitwise operators Bitwise operators are processed prior to Comparison operators Logic operators are processed prior to Assignment operators

Arrays

The ViewBuilder software supports fixed length, one dimensional arrays. Array size is defined by an integer in the range of 0 to 4294967295.

Example:

Array[MAX] MAX=100

This array is defined as having 100 cells, from array index = 0 to array index = 99.

NOTE: The first array index must always be 0, so the upper array index equals the (Maximum number of array cells – 1).

Arrays are initialized as follows:

Int g[5] = {1,2,3,4,5} where the initial values are listed between the {} brackets, separated by commas. Array values are assigned from left to right.

Basic Macro Structure

(1) Every macro must have only one main function that begins and ends with the following statements:

Macro_Command main( )

[statements]

End Macro_Command

Sub functions should be defined prior to the Macro_command main(). A sub function that is called within the main command block prior to being defined will cause a compiler error to occur (“Function not defined”).

82

Page 85: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

(2) All variables must be declared before they are referenced or used. All variables declared outside of a function are defined as global. Variables declared within a sub function are defined as local. Local: The value of the variable remains valid only within a specific statement. Global: The value of the variable remains valid throughout the macro.

NOTE: When a local and global variable have the same declared name, only the local variable will be valid.

A variable is “declared” when it is defined as a specific data type. For example: Macro_Command main( ) Int h Bool a,b,c,d

h=9 (…etc.) In this example, the variable “h” is declared as an integer, and the variables “a”,”b”,”c”, and “d” are declared as Boolean.

Remember that all variables must be declared before the first command statement (before “h=9”, in this example). If a variable declaration appears after a command statement, compile errors will occur. (3) Functions may be defined and called within a macro. A function call must be defined before its execution within the code, otherwise the compiler error “Function not defined” will occur. A sub function is identified by the following beginning and ending statements:

Sub int Func(int I) End Sub Where Int = The type of data to be returned (RK) Func = The name of the function, used when calling the function from the main command block. (int I) = This defines a parameter passed to the sub function (optional). Passed parameters may be of any data type (RK)

83

Page 86: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Parameters can be passed both to and from a sub function through global variables, or with defined parameters. Example:

Sub int Func(int I) Int h=9 I=9*h Return I Returning the calculated value

End Sub Macro_Command main( ) Int I I=Func(i) Calling the sub function End Macro_Command

Command Statements

Variables and constants may be manipulated using the following general command statements:

If-Then Statement

If condition Then [statements] [Else elsestatements] End If

Or If condition Then [statements] [Else [If condition Then [elseifstatements] [else [elsestatements] ] ] ] End If

Where condition is defined as a True or False control statement.

84

Page 87: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

NOTE: In either the single-line logic statement or the block format statement, the Else portion of the command is optional.

Select Case Statement

Select Case testexpression [Case expression1 [statements] ] [Case Else [elsestatements] ] End Select

Where testexpression is a value or character expression.

NOTE: The Case Else portion of the Select Case command block is optional.

Looping Control

For-Next Statements

For-Next statements are used to perform a fixed number of executions of a set of macro commands.

For counter = start To (Down) end [Step step]

[statements]

Next [counter]

Where

counter = an integer or character variable

start = the initial value of Counter

end = the final value of Counter

step = optional increment/decrement step of Counter. Default is 1

statements = command statements performed during looping process (optional).

(Down) is an optional command used to count down, or decrease the counter while looping.

While-Wend Statements

The While-Wend logic block is used to perform a loop as long as a predetermined logic condition is TRUE. When the condition becomes FALSE, the loop is exited.

While condition

85

Page 88: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

[statements]

Wend

Where condition is a True/False control statement.

PLC Communication Commands

A macro can communicate with data in the PLC using the GetData() and SetData() functions.

GetData(Destdata, Addr_type, Addr_offset, Datacount) Where: Destdata = The address of the data you wish to get. Addr_type = The type and encoding method of the PLC address (string). Addr_offset = The address offset of the PLC (integer). Datacount = Number of data (integer).

SetData(Destdata, Addr_type, Addr_offset, Datacount) Where: Destdata = The address of the data you wish to set. Addr_type = The type and encoding method of the PLC address (string) Addr_offset = The address offset of the PLC (integer) Datacount = Number of data (integer)

Miscellaneous Command Statements

Break: Used in looping control or select statements to skip immediately to the end of the statement

Continue: Used in looping control statement. Causes an exit of the current iteration of a loop and begins the next one.

Return: Stops the execution of the current method.

Reserved Keywords

The following keywords are reserved and cannot be used in any function name, array name, or variable name:

+, -, *, /, ^, mod, >=, >, <, <=, <>, ==, And, Or, Xor, Not, <<, >>, =, &, |, ~

If, Then, Else, Endif, Select, Case, For To, Down, Step, Next, While, Wend, Break, Continue, Return

Macro Compile Error Messages

Macro Compile Error Message Description

(1:) Syntax error: “identifier” General syntax problem. Check variable names, basic command format.

(2:) “identifier”: Undefined size of an array The size of an array must be defined h th i d l d E i t

86

Page 89: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

when the array is declared. Ex: int g[10] where 10 is the size of the array.

(3:) strError=Re-declaration error: “identifier” The name of each variable and function must be unique.

(4:) Function name error: “identifier” An attempt was made to use a reserved keyword in a function name.

(5:) Statement missing The command statement is missing a “(“ or “)” character.

(6:) Missing expression in If statement

(7:) Missing “Then” in If statement

(8:) Missing “EndIf”

(9:) Unfinished “If “ statement before “End If”

(10:) Illegal Else statement Check the format of the If-Then-Else statement.

(11:) There should be constant behind “Case”

(12:) Missing “Case” behind “Select”

(13:) Missing “expression” behind “Select Case”

(14:) Missing “End Select” statement

(15:) Illegal “Case” statement

(16:) Unfinished “Select” statement before “End Select”

The general format for a Select Case statement must be: Select Case [expression] Case [constant] Case [constant] Case Else End Select

(17:) “For” statement error: missing “For” before “Next”

(18:) Should be integer of char variable

(19:) Missing assign statement

(20:) Missing keyword “To”

(21:) Missing “Next” statement The general format for a For-Next loop must be:

87

Page 90: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

must be:

For [variable]=[initial value] To [end value] [Step] Next [variable]

(22:) “While” statement error: missing “While before “Wend”

(23:) Missing “Wend” statement

(24:) Illegal “Break” statement The Break statement must be on a separate macro line, and can only be used in For-Next, While-Wend, or Select Case command blocks.

(25:) Illegal “Continue” statement The Continue statement must be on a separate macro line, and can only be used in For-Next or While-Wend command blocks.

(26:) Expression error

(27:) Illegal operation object

(28:) Missing “Sub”

(29:) Missing “Macro_Command”

(30:) Mismatch of the number of parameters

(31:) Mismatch of data type of parameter

(32:) Parameter error The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passed to a function.

(33:) Undefined function

(34:) Illegal member of array

(35:) Illegal definition of array

(36:) Illegal index of array

(37:) Undefined symbol All variables or functions must be declared before use.

(38:) Un-supported PLC data address Make sure that the parameters used in GetData() and/or SetData() are legal PLC addresses.

88

Page 91: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

(39:) Should be integer, character or constant Check for incorrect references to array data.

(40:) Illegal Macro statement before declaration statement

Make sure all variable declarations are listed before the first command statement.

(41:) Floating point can not bitwise shift

(42:) Missing function return value

(43:) Function can not return a value

(44:) Illegal Float data type in expression

(45:) Error PLC address

(46:) Stack can not exceed 4k bytes

(47:) Only one main entrance in the Macro is allowed

(48:) Too many main entrance: “identifier”

2.5.6 Sample Macros

The following sample macros illustrate how functions are performed by the macro command language through the use of basic variable definition and address manipulation.

89

Page 92: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Word to Bits

Bits to Word

90

Page 93: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Bitwise Shift

91

Page 94: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.6 Programming Task Buttons

2.6.1 What is a Task Button?

ViewBuilder provides a method to pop-up (maximize) or icon-ize (minimize) child windows and change window displays.

If the “Task button” is enabled in the Systems Parameter --> General dialog box, then the Task buttons will be displayed along the lower part of the screen on the Window Bar. Press the right-hand task button to pop up a Fast Selection window.

The Fast Selection window can have several user-defined Function Keys for changing to different windows. Since the Fast Selection window is global to all windows, it can be called up at any time. To change windows, simply press the function key that targets the destination window.

The Window Bar accommodates up to six window icons. Double-click the minimize icon of a window to send it to the Window Bar. Click the icon along the Window Bar to return the window to its original location and size.

2.6.2 Setting up Task Buttons

1) From the Edit menu select System Parameter… Click on the General tab. Set the Attribute field under Task button to Enable. Set the Position of the task buttons to the left or right side of the window.

92

Page 95: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

NOTE: The task buttons will be visible at runtime in the lower right or left corner of the display. The Task buttons are not visible when editing a window.

2) Then, from the Window menu Select Open Window.

3) Click Task button, then click the Window or Screen buttons to customize how the Fast select button or Window bar button will look.

4) Fill in the blanks of the Fast Window and Window Selection dialog.

The Fast Window dialog has the settings for the button that controls the bar where window icons are displayed. The Window Attribute dialog has the settings for the button that controls the popup Fast Window.

93

Page 96: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

General: Set “Fast or “Slow to control the pop-up speed.

Shape: Define the shape of task button or window button just as you would any other button object.

Label: Place a customized label on the task or window button.

2.6.3 Creating the Fast Selection Window

Every new project starts with a default Fast Selection Window. This window can be deleted and a new Fast Selection window created to fit your needs.

To create a new Fast Selection window:

1) First, delete the existing Fast Selection window. From the Window menu --> Select Open Window. Choose the Fast Selection Window from the listing and click on Delete.

2) Now click on the New window button.

3) Choose Fast Selection.

94

Page 97: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4) Follow guidelines in next section on Creating New Windows to place buttons and parts on the Fast Selection window.

NOTE: Windows called by Function Keys will replace all other windows being displayed. It is suggested that Toggle Switches be used to call up Indirect or Direct Windows. Indirect and Direct Windows overlay the current window instead of replacing it.

The Function Key object is used to create title bars and minimize icons for child windows. The label text in the title bar will be truncated and shown in the reduced icon form in the window bar.

95

Page 98: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2.7 Simulation

2.7.1 What is ViewWindow?

ViewWindow is a PowerView HMI emulator used to simulate and troubleshoot HMI projects built with the ViewBuilder software. ViewWindow supports most of the functions of a real PowerView HMI panel except for the Master/Slave configuration.

The ViewWindow can be invoked directly from ViewBuilder, although the protocol settings for communication between the PC and PowerView are accessible only from the ViewManager screen.

ViewWindow operates in two simulation modes: On-line simulation: Read/Write data from a real PLC connected through a real PowerView HMI panel. This mode is used to test communications between the HMI project and the PLC without having to actually download the project to the PowerView HMI panel.

For more information on connecting your PC to the PowerView HMI panel and the PLC, see the PowerView Installation and Operation Guide.

Off-line simulation: Read/Write data from a simulated PLC. This mode is used to test the internal functions of the HMI project.

NOTE: ViewWindow does not run at the full speed of a real PowerView HMI panel.

96

Page 99: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2.7.2 Troubleshooting Tools

When a project is running in the ViewWindow simulation mode, a variety of troubleshooting tools are available to monitor and record system functions. To access the tools list, right-click within the simulation window:

The following is a brief description of each troubleshooting tool:

Search: The Search tool is used to search for a specific object or PLC address within the HMI project, and then display the window in which that item is used.

PLC Monitor: This tool monitors the flow of communication between the HMI project and the PLC and can be used to troubleshoot communication problems.

System Resource: This tool displays the current allocation of system resources in the HMI project. It can be used to troubleshoot resource overflow errors.

Data Monitor: This tool watches for changes in object data within the HMI project. It can be used to verify that parts/objects update correctly when activated from the HMI.

Emulator Setting: This panel controls how the simulated HMI is displayed on your PC.

NOTE: If you turn off “bitmap background mode” in the Emulator Setting window, then these functions will be available in the Tool menu rather than through the right-click menu. For more information, see Emulator Setting.

Search

This tool is used to search for a specific object or PLC address in the HMI project, and then display the window in which that item is used.

97

Page 100: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

To search for a PLC address:

1) Click the PLC radio button.

2) Choose the type of address to search for and enter the search range. For example, search for addresses WD0006 through WD0020:

To search for a single address rather than a range, leave the second field blank. For example, search for address WD0006 only:

To search for a part/object:

1) Click the Part radio button.

2) Select the type of part/object to search for from the drop-down menu.

98

Page 101: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Once you have configured your search, click the Search button. The search results are displayed in the listbox below. Double-click on any result to jump to the window in which that item is used. The item will blink to show its location within the window.

PLC Monitor

This tool monitors the flow of communication between the HMI project and the PLC and can be used to troubleshoot communication problems.

Read PLC Block Information: This pane provides a window-by-window, block-by-block break down of the HMI project, showing which HMI windows and objects are associated with which PLC blocks.

PLC Block Activity: This pane provides a real-time view of every transaction between the HMI project and the PLC. (Local communication between objects within the HMI project is not shown.)

99

Page 102: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Check the Block Capture checkbox to begin the monitor. Uncheck the checkbox to pause the monitor. Click on any transaction to display its associated object in the Read PLC Block Information pane above.

CAUTION: Pausing the monitor does NOT pause communication between the HMI and the PLC.

To reset the PLC Monitor window, click the Update Information button.

System Resource

This tool displays the current allocation of system resources in the HMI project. It can be used to troubleshoot resource overflow errors.

DRAM: The amount of memory, in bytes, allocated to each of the project’s windows.

Window 0 is an invisible, system-defined window used to maintain Trend Displays, Event Displays, and some internal data structures. The total memory allocated to Window 0 depends on the Max Open Popup Window setting in the project’s System Paremeters:

100

Page 103: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

total memory of Window 0 = 150 KB + [(6 - Max Open Popup Window) * 350 KB]

In the example above, total memory of Window 0 = 150 KB + [(6 - 5) * 350 KB] = 500 KB.

All other windows are user-defined.

Timer: The number of objects keyed to the project’s timers. The objects are checked/refreshed upon each tick of their timer. Trend Display objects are keyed to the 1 second timer. Set Bit / Set Word objects are keyed to the 0.1 second timer.

Message Queue: The queues used to store the process messages between objects within the HMI project (Object Queue) and between the HMI and the PLC (PLCBlock Queue).

Data Monitor

This tool watches for changes in object data – such as switching off to on or incrementing a numeric value – within the HMI project. Whenever any data changes, the affected object and PLC address are displayed in the monitor window along with their new data value. This tool can be used to verify that parts/objects update correctly when activated from the HMI.

To monitor all of the objects in the project, check the All Objects checkbox. To monitor specific types of objects, check the corresponding checkboxes in the Monitor Object panel.

To pause the display of data changes, check the Pause checkbox.

CAUTION: Checking the Pause checkbox does NOT pause the project simulation or communication with the PLC (if on-line). It pauses the display of data changes in the monitor window only.

Emulator Setting

This preferences panel controls how the HMI project is displayed on your PC.

101

Page 104: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Test Emulator mode: This preference controls how the simulated HMI is displayed on your PC. If checked, then the HMI is displayed in a mock PowerView frame, as shown in Section 2.7.1.

If unchecked, then the HMI is displayed in a plain emulator window:

NOTE: If you choose the plain emulator window, then the simulation tools and print commands that were previously accessible only through right-clicking will now be available in the window’s menu bar. Additional messages are displayed in the window’s status bar.

Object Information: These preferences control the emulator’s ability to display additional information about the parts/objects used in the HMI project.

102

Page 105: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Objects: Specify for which objects the additional information will be displayed. To display all objects, groups of objects, and windows, click the All objects checkbox. To display only certain types of objects, click their individual checkboxes.

Address: Display the read and/or write addresses to which the specified objects are linked.

Object Frame: Display the frames of the specified objects.

Small Font: Display the Address and Object Id in a smaller font.

Transparent: Display the Address and Object Id transparently (i.e. without a black background).

Object Id: Display the ID numbers of the specified objects. NOTE: These ID numbers denote the order in which the objects were created and are not the same as the object IDs displayed by the Window Property setting.

Common Window: Display the common window of the HMI. The Address, Object Frame, and Object Id of the Common Window may be displayed, depending on which other preferences are selected.

2.7.3 Programming Considerations

To conform with ICS Safety Recommendations, checks should be placed in the controller to ensure that all writable registers that control critical parts of plant or machinery have limit checks built into the program, with an out-of-limit safe shutdown procedure to ensure safety of personnel.

ICS 3-304.81 Safety Recommendations:

Consideration should be given to the use of an emergency stop function, which is independent of the programmable controller.

Where the operator is exposed to the machinery, such as in loading or unloading a machine tool, or where the machine cycles automatically, consideration should be given to the use of an electromechanical override or other redundant means, independent of the programmable controller, for starting and interrupting the cycle.

If provision is required for changing programs while the equipment is in operation, consideration should be given to the use of locks or other means of assuring that only authorized personnel can make such changes.

These recommendations are intended as safeguards against the failure of critical components and the effects of such failures or the inadvertent errors that might be introduced if programs are changed while the equipment is in operation.*

* The ICS 3-304.81 Safety Recommendations are reprinted by permission of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association form NEMA ICS 3-304.

103

Page 106: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Chapter 3: Parts Reference Guide

104

Page 107: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.1 List of Parts Icon Name Function ID#

Bit Lamp Displays ON or OFF shape to reflect current bit status in the

device. BL-nnn

Word Lamp Displays a different shape to reflect current register data in

the device. WL-nnn

Set Bit Forces a set or reset of a device bit address data (coil). SB-nnn

Set Word Write specified data to device word address (register). SW-nnn

Toggle Switch Combination of bit lamp and set bit parts. TS-nnn

Multi-State Switch Combination of word lamp and set word parts. MS-nnn

Function Key Create a touch area to change screen, input data, pop up or

minimize a window. FK-nnn

Numeric Input Extend Display device registers data in numeric form and allow

keypad input for changes. NE-nnn

Numeric Data Display the device register data in numeric form only. ND-nnn

ASCII Input Extend

Display the device register data in ASCII and accept keypad input.

AE-nnn

ASCII Data Display the device register data as ASCII characters. AD-nnn

Moving Shape Moves a changeable object around the screen. MV-nnn

Animation Moves a changeable object along predefined points on the

screen. AN-nnn

Indirect Window Designate to call a specific pop up window by a device

address. WP-nnn

Direct Window Control a preset pop up window by a device bit address WC-nnn

Alarm Display Display alarm messages for a preset location. AL-nnn

Trend Display Periodically retrieve a group of device register data and

display as values verses time. TD-nnn

105

Page 108: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Bar Graph Display the device register data as a bar graph (horizontal or

vertical). BG-nnn

Meter Display an angle indicator to reflect current device register

data. MD-nnn

Alarm Bar Display alarm messages as triggered by bit status, scrolling

on a single line. AB-nnn

Recipe Transfer Function

Save/Download data to/from recipe memory RP-nnn

Event Display Display the event message for a preset location ED-nnn

XY Plot Display an XY curve of register data XY-nnn

106

Page 109: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.2 Bit Lamp

A Bit Lamp displays the ON or OFF status of a designated CONTROL DEVICE bit address. If the bit status is OFF, the state 0 shape will be displayed. If the bit status is ON, the state 1 shape will be displayed. The corresponding label will also be displayed if “Use Label is enabled.

To place a Bit Lamp:

1) Click the Bit Lamp icon.

2) Fill in General Tab items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Bit Lamp

Read Address: Bit in the CONTROL DEVICE that controls the Bit Lamp state, shape and label.

Device type: the bit prefix.

Device address: the bit number.

Attribute: This area is used to set-up the display functions. There are two Functions for a Bit Lamp: Normal and Blinking on State.

If Normal is selected the Bit Lamp is displayed as the state of its shape/bitmap and/or labels.

Blinking on State 0 causes the shape to blink when the device address is OFF.

Blinking on State 1 causes the shape to blink when the device address is ON.

107

Page 110: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

If Blinking on State 0 or 1 is selected then the Break Time field is used to set the blink duty cycle. The integer entered in the Break Time field represents half of the 50-50 duty cycle in 1/10ths of a second.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shapes or Bitmaps to display bit OFF & ON states. For this Bit Lamp a two state object needs to be selected or created.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in the Attribute fields..

Color is the color of the text for the State indicated.

Font is the size of the text.

Align is used if multiple lines are in the label.

Content contains the text to denote OFF & ON states. Use the State dropdown to toggle between the OFF and ON texts.

Select Use label to make it visible on the part and Tracking if appropriate.

5) Click OK, position the bit lamp and resize it if necessary.

108

Page 111: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.3 Word Lamp

A Word Lamp changes state according to the value of designated control device word address. If the value equals to 0, the first shape will be displayed. If the value equals to 1, the second shape will be displayed, and so on. The corresponding label will also be displayed if “Use Label is enabled.

To place a Word Lamp:

1) Click Word Lamp icon

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Word Lamp

Read Address: Control device address (word device) that controls the Word Lamp state, shape and label.

Data Format: Binary Code Decimal (BCD) or Binary (BIN)

No. of states: Specify total number of states.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display word states

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote each state

5) Click OK then position the Word Lamp and resize if necessary

109

Page 112: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Data Format Types

BIN (binary format): Decimal numbers are encoded by bit weight. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Value 32,768 16,384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

Example: 0110100101110110 = 26,998

BCD (binary coded decimal format): Decimal numbers are encoded by bit weight per 4-bit nibble. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value x1000 x100 x10 x1

Example: 0110100101110110 = 6976

110

Page 113: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.4 Set Bit

The Set Bit defines a touch area, that when activated changes the state of a specified bit.

To place a Set Bit:

1) Click the Set Bit icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Set Bit Part

Write Address: Control device address (Bit device) that is forced ON or OFF by Set Bit.

Set Style: See table below.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display bit states that represent the touch area.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states

5) Click OK, then position the Set Bit and resize it if necessary.

NOTE: Shapes and bitmaps assigned to set bit parts change state only when the part on the screen is touched. They do not change state according to the device address’ state.

Set Style Functions Set Style Description

111

Page 114: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

ON When the Set Bit Part is pressed, the designated device address is turned ON. The state continues (i.e. remains ON) even after release.

OFF When the Set Bit Part is pressed, the designated device address is turned OFF. The state continues (i.e. remains OFF) even after release.

Toggle Every time the Set Bit Part is pressed, the designated device address is complemented (ON OFF, OFF ON)(Toggles).

Momentary Only while the Set Bit Part is held down (pressed), is the specified device address turned ON. Likewise, when the switch is released, the specified bit address is turned OFF. Note: This software has three operational modes to handle momentary switch operations, based on the current value of LW9044. Use an “initial set SET WORD in the start-up window to configure the desired operating mode. Operating Modes are as follows: 0: Window pop-up is enabled during touch operations (down and up), when the touch is released (up) the BIT that was previously set ON will be set OFF even if the pop-up window hides the momentary switch (default mode of operation). 1: Window pop-up is disabled during touch operations (down and up). This prevents pop-up windows from hiding momentary switches. 2: Window pop-up is enabled during touch operations (down and up). If the momentary switch is hidden by a pop-up window at the time touch release (up), the BIT will not be reset.

Set ON at window open

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is opened, the designated device address is turned ON.

Set OFF at window open

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is opened, the designated device address is turned OFF.

Periodical toggle

Changes the state of the designated bit at a regular interval as selected in the Interval dropdown. Interval time in actual operation may vary from specified. Do not use this function for critical timing.

Set ON at window close

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is closed, the designated device address is turned ON.

112

Page 115: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Set OFF at window close

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is closed, the designated device address is turned OFF.

Set ON at window maximized

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is maximized, the designated device address is turned ON.

Set OFF at window maximized

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is maximized, the designated device address is turned OFF.

Set ON at window minimized

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is minimized, the designated device address is turned ON.

Set OFF at window minimized

When the window containing this Set Bit Part is minimized, the designated device address is turned OFF.

Set ON at backlight off

When the backlight is turned off, the designated device address is turned ON.

Set OFF at backlight off

When the backlight is turned off, the designated device address is turned OFF.

Set ON at enter success

When a function key with the ENT attribute is pressed in response to a Numeric Input or ASCII Input part and the attempt to write the data succeeds, the designated device address is turned ON.

Set OFF at enter success

When a function key with the ENT attribute is pressed in response to a Numeric Input or ASCII Input part and the attempt to write the data succeeds, the designated device address is turned OFF.

113

Page 116: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.5 Set Word

The Set Word defines a touch area that when activated writes a predefined value (constant) to the designated CONTROL DEVICE address.

To place a Set Word:

1) Click the Set Word icon

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Set Word.

Write Address: Word in the CONTROL DEVICE that controls the Set Word state, shape and label. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information (See note on Word Lamp Part). No. of words is restricted to 1 for this part.

Set Style: See table below

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display word states and represent the touch area.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states

5) Click OK, then position the Set Word and resize it if necessary

Set Style Functions

Set Style Description Attribute window features Set Constant

When the Set Word is pressed, preset Set Value data is written to the designated device word address.

114

Page 117: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Add value (JOG+)

Every time the Set Word is pressed, the Inc. value is added to the current value of the designated device word address, if the result is not larger than Upper limit.

Sub Value (JOG-)

Every time the Set Word is pressed, the Dec. value is subtracted from the current value of the designated device word address, if the result is not less than Bottom limit.

JOG++ When the Set Word is held for a time longer than JOG delay*, the Inc value is added to the current value of the designated device address in every interval, if the result is not larger than the Upper limit. The interval is defined as JOG speed*.

JOG-- When the Set Word is held for a time longer than JOG delay*, the Dec value is subtracted to the current value of the designated device word address in every interval, if the result is not smaller than the Bottom limit. The interval is defined as JOG speed*.

Set at window open

When the window containing this part is opened, the Set Value data is written to the designated word.

Periodical JOG++

This Attribute becomes active automatically when the window is active. The Inc Value is added to the current value of the designated device word, if the result is not larger than the Upper Limit. Once the Upper Limit is reached or exceeded, the value returns to zero and incrementing begins again. The Break Time is the time between increments.

Periodical JOG--

This Attribute becomes active automatically when the window is active. The Dec. Value is subtracted from the designated word, if the result is not less that Bottom Limit. Once the Bottom Limit is reached or exceeded, decrementing stops. The Break Time is the time between increments.

Set at window close

Set Value data is written to the designated word automatically when the window containing it is closed.

115

Page 118: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Periodical bounce

This Attribute becomes active automatically when the window is active. The Inc. Value is added to the value of the designated word at regular intervals as specified by the Break Time, until the Upper Limit is reached. Then the Inc Value is subtracted from the designated word until zero is reached. This cycle is repeated until the window becomes inactive.

Step up This Attribute becomes active automatically when the window is open. At every Break Time interval the value in the designated word is incremented until the High limit is reached. Then the value is reset to its Low limit and started again. This cycle is repeated until the window becomes inactive.

Step down This Attribute becomes active automatically when the window is active. At every Break Time interval the value in the designated word is decremented until the Low Limit is reached. Then the value is reset to its High Limit and started again. This cycle is repeated until the window becomes inactive.

Set at window maximized

Set Value data is written to the designated word automatically when the window containing it is maximized.

Set at window minimized

Set Value data is written to the designated word automatically when the window containing it is minimized.

Set at backlight off

Set Value data is written to the designated word automatically when the backlight is turned off.

Set at enter success

When a function key with the ENT attribute is pressed in response to a Numeric Input or ASCII Input part and the attempt to write the data succeeds, the designated Device Address is loaded with the Set Value.

Set at enter fail

When a function key with the ENT attribute is pressed in response to a Numeric Input or ASCII Input part and the attempt to write the data fails, the designated Device Address is loaded with the Set Value.

* JOG Delay: The interval that the part must be touched before repeat action occurs.

116

Page 119: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

* JOG Speed: The interval between repeat actions once repeating begins.

Interval times in actual operation may vary from specified. Do not use these features for critical timing requirements.

117

Page 120: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.6 Toggle Switch

The toggle switch is a combination of Bit Lamp and Set Bit. It represents the ON/OFF status of a device bit address, and defines a touch area. When activated, it may turn the same or different specified bit ON or OFF.

To place a Toggle Switch:

1) Click the Toggle Switch icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Toggle Switch

Read Address: Bit in the device that controls the Toggle Switch state, shape and label

Write Address: Bit in the device that is controlled by the Toggle Switch Set Style

Set Style: See Set Style Functions table below.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display bit states and represent the touch area.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states.

118

Page 121: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

5) Click OK, position the Toggle Switch and resize it if necessary.

Set Style Functions

Set Style Description ON When the Set Bit Part is pressed, the designated device bit address is

turned ON. The state continues (i.e. remains ON) even after released. OFF When the Set Bit Part is pressed, the designated device bit address is

turned OFF. The state continues (i.e. remains OFF) even after released. Toggle Every time the Set Bit is pressed, the designated device bit is

complemented (ON OFF, OFF ON) Momentary* Only while the Set Bit is held down (pressed), is the specified device bit

address turned ON. Likewise, when the switch is released, the specified bit address is turned OFF.

* This software has three operational modes to handle momentary switch operations, based on the current value of LW9044. Use an “initial set SET WORD in the start-up window to configure the desired operating mode. Operating Modes are as follows:

0: Window pop-up is enabled during touch operations (down and up), when the touch is released (up) the BIT that was previously set ON will be set OFF even if the pop-up window hides the momentary switch (default mode of operation).

1: Window pop-up is disabled during touch operations (down and up). This prevents pop-up windows from hiding momentary switches.

2: Window pop-up is enabled during touch operations (down and up). If the momentary switch is hidden by a pop-up window at the time touch release (up), the BIT will not be reset.

NOTE: The state of the toggle switch shape/bitmap corresponds directly to the state of the read bit. This is different from the Set Bit part, which only changes shape/bitmap when touched.

119

Page 122: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.7 Multi-State Switch

The Multi-State Switch is a combination of Word Lamp and Set Word. It displays a different state depending on the value of the device monitor word address. It also defines a touch area that when activated, writes a specified data to the device word address, which may be the same as the Read address or a different address.

To place a Multi-State Switch:

1) Click the Multi-State Switch icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Multi-State Switch.

Read Address: Word in the device that controls the Multi-State Switch state, shape and label. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information (See note on Word Lamp part). No. of words is restricted to 1 for this part.

Write Address: Word in the device that is controlled by the Multi-State Switch Set Style. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information. No. of words is restricted to 1 for this part.

Switch Style: See table below.

No. of states: Specify total number of states. The number of states is restricted to a maximum of 32 states.

120

Page 123: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display states and represent the touch area.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states.

5) Click OK, position the Multi-State Switch and resize it if necessary.

Set Style Functions:

Set Style Description

JOG+ When the Multi-State Switch is pressed, the value in the designated write address is increased by one.

JOG- When the Multi-State Switch is pressed, the value in the designated write address is decreased by one.

121

Page 124: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.8 Function Key

The Function Key can be used to change screen display, input digits or ASCII characters, minimize windows, move windows and enable a message board.

To place a Function Key:

1) Click the Function Key icon.

2) Fill in General Tab items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Multi-State Switch

Character Code: Determines what function will occur when pressed, See options below

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to display states and represent the touch area

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states

5) Click OK, position the Function Key and resize it if necessary

3.8.1 Special Key Functions

Character Codes and Creating a Keypad

122

Page 125: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

A keypad is composed of a variety of function keys with different ASCII codes. Special keys such as “ENT (enter), “BS (backspace), “CLR (clear) and “ESC (Escape) can also be represented. By creating one function key and then duplicating it, changing it’s character code and arranging keys in a regular pattern, a keypad can be created. Since any character can be assigned to a function key, specialized keypads can be made for any application. Keypads are used with the Numeric Input parts to change their values. Keypads can be saved in the Group Library for use whenever needed.

A Numeric keypad consisting of 0~9, ‘.’,’-‘,BS, ESC and ENT

An ASCII keypad consisting of A~Z, BS, ESC and ENT

3.8.2 Hard Copy (Print Function)

Printer functions facilitate the printing of screen data. Data is sent out as a graphic through the parallel printer port. PV-1040 and PV-770 models have print capabilities.

Use the Hard Copy radio button to select printer action. The Attributes button can then be pressed, bringing up the following screen.

123

Page 126: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Selection Print Action

Print Text & Meter & Trend Prints bit and numerical data parts along with drawn objects and text placed on the display.

Print Text & Meter & Trend & All Shape but not including patterns

Prints the outline of bit and numerical data parts along with drawn objects, text and shapes placed on the display.

Print Text & Meter & Trend & Bitmaps Prints bit and numerical data parts along with drawn objects, text and bitmaps placed on the display.

Print Text & Meter & Trend & Bitmap & All Shape but including pattern

Prints the outline of bit and numerical data parts along with drawn objects, text, bitmaps and shapes placed on the display.

Print Text & Meter & Trend & Bitmap & All Shape

Prints bit and numerical data parts along with drawn objects, text, bitmaps, and shapes placed on the display.

Next Page Prints a Form Feed command.

3.8.3 Change Window

If the Change Window option is selected, when the touch area is pressed (activated), the current screen will be terminated and it will display the window designated by “Window No..

124

Page 127: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.8.4 Return to Previous

This function terminates the existing window and recalls the last active window. For example: If window 21 was replaced by window 32, and window 32 had a function key defined as “Return to Previous, then, when the function key is pressed, the screen will be clear and displays window 21.

3.8.5 Change Common Window

If the function key is set as “Change Common Window, when the touch area is pressed (activated) the common window will be replaced by the specified window.

3.8.6 Pop-up Window

If the function key is set as “Popup Window, when the touch area is pressed (activated), the window designated by Window No. will be displayed over top of the base window. The existing window(s) are not terminated.

125

Page 128: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.8.7 Close Window

A Close Window function key terminates the window it is placed in when pressed. In this way the operator can terminate Popup Windows.

‘Popup’ Window 100

Window 100

Window 10 Window 10

CAUTION: Closing all windows may leave the operator with no way to proceed! Be sure to have a way for the operator or PLC to call up a window.

3.8.8 JOG FS-Window

This function changes the popup window that appears when the Fast Select Task Bar button is pressed. The window specified in this function must be exactly the same size as the original Fast Select window (window number 4).

126

Page 129: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.8.9 Window Bar

A function key defined with “Window Bar attribute is used to move the position of a window on the screen. A pop up window on the screen, that has a function key inside the window with the “window bar attributes, can be moved by touching the function key then touching a second position, the window is moved to that place.

First touch activate the window move function

Second touch move the window to the desired place

3.8.10 Minimize Window

If a pop-up window on the screen has a function key with “minimize window inside it, when the function key is pressed, the window will be minimized to the window icon on the bottom of the screen. A touch on the window icon will maximize the window again.

Window Minimiz

Touch minimize function

127

Page 130: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.8.11 Message Board

One window can be registered as message board. The message board is used as a scratch area that the operator can use to hand write notes on the screen. The message board related function keys include:

Set operation mode: Used to define how a touch will act on the Message Board

Set Pen Style: set the width of pen by clicking the Attribute button

Set Pen Color: set the color of pen by clicking the Attribute button

Clear board: clear the whole area of the Message Board

128

Page 131: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.9 Numeric Input Extend

The Numeric Input Extend part displays the current value of a PLC register data. If the Trigger Address bit is active, once the area of shape is touched, the Numeric Input will be activated for data entry. A flashing cursor indicating input via keypad will be activated. Use the keypad to enter data to the PLC register designated by “read address.

Display current reading value

Touch the shape area to activate the data entry operation

Enter data by keypad.

To place a Numeric Input:

1) Click the Numeric Input icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

129

Page 132: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Numeric Input

Read Address: Word in the PLC that is displayed and modified by the Numeric Input. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information (See Note on Word Lamp Part). No. of words is restricted to 1 Word (16 Bits) or 2 Words (32 Bits) for this part.

Trigger Address: Bit in the PLC that control the validity of data entry. If bit is OFF, data entry is disabled.

3) Fill in Numeric Tab items:

Display: Manipulates data so it is displayed in a useful format.

Numeric: Sets up decimal point location and scaling factors. See “Setting Numeric Display Format below for details.

4) Go to Shape Tab and select Shape or Bitmap to move and display state.

5) Go to Font Tab and assign a label to the part, if desired. Fill in attributes for the displayed digits. See “Font Alignment below for details.

6) Click OK, position the Numeric Input part on the window.

When the user activates a Numeric or ASCII Input object, the PV unit turns LB9060 ON. After user input and entry, the PV unit checks the input data. If the data is valid then LB9060 is turned OFF, otherwise the input remains active waiting for a valid entry. This is very useful for keypad pop-up emulation, see below.

3.9.1 Invisible Keys and Pop-up Keypad Emulation

This is a brief example of how to create a pop-up keypad for use in your applications. The way it works when finished is:

Operator touches the displayed numeric value.

A keypad pops up.

The operator enters a value and presses the enter key.

The keypad disappears.

The new value is displayed.

How to create it:

1) Create the keypad with an Enter key and save it to a group library. Alternatively, use one of the keypads already provided in the keypads.glb library. The key is to group the keypad and find it’s overall dimensions. This can be done easily by drawing a rectangle around the keypad and then looking at the rectangle’s Attribute - Profile tab. For this example Keypad 0

130

Page 133: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

of the keypads.glb library is used. The dimensions are 165W x 168H pixels.

2) Create a window with overall dimensions that match the dimensions of the keypad you are using. You may have to factor in a border if you select one for the window. Place the keypad in this window. For example: Use Window 11. The dimensions are 173W x 176H pixels because a border of 4 pixels per side has been selected.

3) Create Numeric Input objects on the window you are developing for your project. Set the Trigger address attribute to the same bit for all of the Numeric Input objects. Be sure to set the Input low and high ranges on the Numeric tab. For example: Use Window 10. The Trigger address attribute is set to LB 7. The input ranges are set as 0 to 1000. The three Numeric Input objects are shown as NI_0, NI_1, NI_2.

131

Page 134: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4) Create a Set Bit object for the Trigger address with the Set ON at window open action. Do not assign a Shape or Bitmap to the object, thereby making it invisible to the operator. Place the Set bit object out of the way. For example: the Set Bit object is LB 0 placed in the corner (shown as SB_0).

5) Create a Direct Window object that is triggered by Trigger address and calls up the window with the keypad. Once placed, adjust the Profile to be the same size as the dimensions of the keypad window. DO NOT place the Direct Window over top of the Numeric Input objects. For

132

Page 135: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

example: The Direct Window object is triggered by LB9068 (System’s Input Active bit) and calls up Window 11. The Profile is set to 173W x 176H pixels.

6) Save, Compile and Simulate to verify proper operation. When the Data Input object is touched the keypad should pop-up and data entry should be activated. Enter a valid number, press enter, and the keypad should disappear.

3.9.2 Setting Numeric Display Format

Decimal: specify the number of digits above and below the decimal point to be displayed.

Raw Data Display: The read value is displayed in its original form and the decimal point is displayed in the position specified by No. below Dec. For example if No. below Dec. = 2, a raw value of “14561 is displayed as 145.61 .

Do conversion: The read value is converted to its engineering unit before display scaling is performed as follows:

133

Page 136: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Display value = [(reading value – Input Low) * (Engineering High – Engineering Low)] / (Input High – Input Low)

The Display value will be displayed according to the setting of “No. above decimal point“ and “No. below decimal point. For example if conversion value is 123.456 and the No. below Dec. = 2, No. above Dec. = 3, then the conversion value is displayed as “123.45, the last digit is truncated.

Hex: The number is displayed in hex (0~F) format, scaling and decimal point are disabled.

Binary: The number is displayed in binary (0~1) format. Scaling and decimal point are disabled.

Mask: Display only “****” and ignore the reading value. This is used for security code input, scaling and decimal point are disabled.

For Hex and Binary format, the input high and input low is treated as unsigned binary data.

Single float: Data in the controller is translated from a 32 bit IEEE Floating-Point format to a decimal number and displayed.

Double float: Data in the controller is translated from a 64 bit IEEE Floating-Point format to a decimal number and displayed.

In data entry mode, if Raw data display is selected, then the Input Low and Input High will limit the range of valid input data. If Do conversion is selected, Engineering High and Engineering Low are used to limit the range of valid input data.

3.9.3 Font Alignment

Font Format: The Font attributes specify the size and color of display numeric digits. Available font sizes include 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 72 and 96. Align selection is applicable for decimal format only. Below is an example of how the alignment functions.

If a display format is set as “No. above decimal = 5, “No. below decimal = 0 with reading value 123, it will be displayed in various formats as follows:

134

Page 137: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Right adjust 1 2 3

Left adjust 1 2 3

Leading zero 0 0 1 2 3

135

Page 138: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.10 Numeric Data

A Numeric Data part displays the current reading of a designated PLC register data. Data is displayed as text, no shape or bitmap can be associated with this part.

To place a Numeric Data part:

1) Click the Numeric Data icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Numeric Data.

Read Address: Word in the PLC that is displayed and modified by the Numeric Data. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information (See Note on Word Lamp Part). No. of words is restricted to 1 Word (16 Bits) or 2 Words (32 Bits) for this part.

3) Fill in Numeric Tab items: See Numeric Input Part for details.

Display: Manipulates data so it is displayed in a useful format.

Numeric: Sets up decimal point location and scaling factors.

4) Go to Font Tab: Fill in attributes of the displayed digits. See Numeric Input Part for details.

5) Click OK, position the Numeric Data.

136

Page 139: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.11 ASCII Input Extend

ASCII Input Extend parts display current value of the PLC register data as decoded by the standard ASCII character table. If the Trigger address bit is active, when the shape area is touched, ASCII Input will be available through an alphanumeric keypad.

Reading value is decoded in ASCII code and displayed

Touch the shapearea to activateinput operation

Enter data from alphanumeric keypad

Entered data is put into consecutive PLC registers starting with the “Read address. The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed at the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed at the right.

To place an ASCII Input part:

1) Click the ASCII Input icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

137

Page 140: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the ASCII Input.

Read Address: Word or words (up to 16 words may be addressed in this manner, each word contains 2 ASCII characters) in the PLC that is displayed and modified by the ASCII Input

Trigger Address: Bit in the PLC that controls the ability to enter data into the Read Address. If bit is OFF, data entry is disabled.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or BMP to move and display state.

4) Go to Font Tab: Fill in attributes of the displayed data. See Numeric Input Part for details.

5) Click OK, position the ASCII Input.

138

Page 141: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.12 ASCII Data

ASCII Data parts display the current value of the PLC register data.

The data is decoded using the standard ASCII character table. The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed at the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed at the right.

To place an ASCII Data part:

1) Click the ASCII Data icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the ASCII Data.

Read Address: Word or words (up to 16 words may be addressed in this manner, each word contains 2 ASCII characters) in the PLC that are displayed.

3) Go to Font Tab: Fill in attributes of the displayed data. See Numeric Input Part- Font Format for details.

139

Page 142: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4) Click OK, position the ASCII Data.

140

Page 143: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.13 Moving Shape

The Moving Shape tool is used to place an object on the window at a location specified by the PLC. The state and the absolute location of the shape on the window depend on current reading value of three continuous PLC registers.Typically, the first register controls the state of the object. The Second register controls the horizontal position (X), and the third register controls the vertical position.

X & Y position is controlled by the PLC

To place a Moving Shape:

1) Click the Moving Shape icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Moving Shape

Read Address: Word in the PLC that controls the Moving Shape state, position and label

Style: See Table below

141

Page 144: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to move and display states.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states, if desired.

5) Click OK, position the Moving Shape to the initial position (when X =0 and Y= 0 ) and resize it if necessary.

Control Style Functions

Up to 32 different states can be assigned to the Part’s shape. Position is controlled as shown in the table below. Position is relative to the original location of shape.

Control style X position Y position X & Y position

Read Address Shape or BMP state Shape or BMP state Shape or BMP state

Read Address+1 X position Y position X position

Read Address+2 Not used Not used Y position

When scaling is used, scaling is performed as follows:

Display value = [ (reading value – Input low) / (Input high – Input low) ] * (Scaling high – Scaling low)

When reverse scaling is used, scaling is performed as follows:

Display value = [ (Input high – reading value) / (Input high – Input low) ] * (Scaling high – Scaling low)

Possible Selections:

142

Page 145: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.14 Animation

The Animation Part is used to place an object on the window at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC. The state and the absolute location of the shape on the window depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers. Typically, the first register controls the state of the object, and the second controls the position along the predefined path. As the PLC position register changes value the shape or bitmap jumps to the next position along the path.

The selected graphic will move along the predefined track, as depicted right, when (read address+1) = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4.

To place an Animation object:

1) Click the Animation icon.

2) Click on the screen to define the path and the stopping points for the object to travel, then click the right mouse button to complete the path setup.

3) Double click on the animation part to pop up the edit dialog box.

4) Fill in General Tab Items:

143

Page 146: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Animation

Read Address: Word in the PLC that controls the Animation state, position and label. Data in the register may be interpreted as Binary or BCD information (See Note on Word Lamp Part). No. of words is restricted to 2 Words for this part.

No. of states: Select the total number of states for the object. This determines what shape or bitmap will be displayed at the stop along the path.

5) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to move and display states

6) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states, if desired.

7) Go to the Profile tab: The Profile tab settings are used to numerically set the following:

Size: The dimensional area on the screen that the outside edge of the path occupies.

Position: The location of the upper left-hand corner of the Animation area.

Shape Rect. Size: The size of the shape or bitmap that is used in the Animation.

8) Click OK to complete the setting.

Note on Read Data Assignment:

Read Address Shape or BMP state

Read Address+1 Position number on the path

144

Page 147: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.15 Indirect Window

The Indirect Window places a registered window over the current screen. The Indirect Window screen is created the same as a regular window. Usually the size is made smaller than full window size. The Indirect Window calls up a window that is specified by a word address. There is no absolute limitation to the maximum registered Indirect Windows parts. However, at run time, only six windows at a time can be displayed simultaneously on each screen.

Screen 10 Register an Indirect Window with “Read Address= D100”

D99

D100 21

D101

Screen 10

At on line operation, D100 designates the window number

Window 21 is popped up by Indirect Window.

Screen 10

Window 20 is popped up by Indirect Window.

D99

D100 20

D101

145

Page 148: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

To place an Indirect Window:

1) Click the Indirect Window icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Indirect Window

Read Address: PLC word address that designate the screen to be popped up on the window.

3) Click OK, then position the Indirect Window and resize it if necessary. The size of the Indirect Window limits the area of the popped up window. The area of popped up window that lies outside of the Indirect Window boundary will not be displayed. The Function Key can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features.

NOTE: Indirect Windows disable pop-up Function Keys placed on the same screen. A window can only be triggered by one method.

146

Page 149: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.16 Direct Window

The Direct Window places a registered window over the current window. The popped up window is displayed in the area of Direct Window. Usually the size of the Direct Window is set the same as that of the popped up window. There is no absolute limitation for the maximum number of Direct Windows. However at run time, a maximum of six windows can be displayed simultaneously.

Window 10 Register a direct window with “Read Address= M10” and “Window Number= 100”

Window 10 At runtime when M10=1 pop up window 100 appears.

The keypad is registered in window 100 .

147

Page 150: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

To place a Direct Window:

1) Click the Direct Window icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Direct Window.

Read Address: Bit in the PLC that activates the Direct Window.

Window No.: Designate the window to pop up.

3) Click OK, position the Direct Window where you want it to pop up and resize it if necessary. The size of the window limits the area of display. The area of popped up window out of the direct window boundary will not be displayed. Function Key parts can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features.

NOTE: Direct Windows disable pop-up Function Keys for the same window number placed on the same screen. A window can be triggered by only one method.

148

Page 151: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.17 Alarm Display

The Alarm Display icon opens a window to display all the messages registered in Alarm Scan list with alarm condition.

Example of an Alarm Display:

Shape (SP_0) is used for the background rectangle. Some TEXT is placed on the Shape to identify what is being displayed. Two Set Word parts (SW_6, SW_7) are used to increment and decrement the alarm register. The actual Alarm Display part (AL_0) is placed on top of the shape. The alarm messages appear in the Alarm Display.

TEXTSHAPE

ALARM DISPLAY

SET WORD To scroll up

SET WORD To scroll down

Online Operation

149

Page 152: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

To place an Alarm Display:

1) Click the Alarm Display icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Alarm Display

Read Address: The Read Address controls the scrolling, up and down, of the alarm display window. All active alarm messages are sorted by time with the new alarms displayed on top and the older ones on the bottom. If the register value is N, then the top N-1 messages will be ignored and the number N+1 message of the order of arrival is placed on the first line of the display window.

Data Format : BIN(binary) or BCD(binary coded decimal)

Display line: Specifies the height of the window in lines at one message per line.

Char. length: Specifies the width of the window in characters, extra characters past this length will be truncated.

3) Click OK, position the Alarm Display where desired.

150

Page 153: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.18 Trend Display

The Trend Display periodically retrieves a block of PLC data and displays the data over time. As each sampling period elapses, new data is read from the PLC and inserted towards the left side of the trend graph, the trend graph, when full, is shifted to the right direction. The Trend Display is retrieved on a real time basis.

An example of a typical trend display is shown above. A Shape is used for the background and Scales are added to show relative information about the trend. The trend display is then placed on the Shape. The newest data is inserted into the left side and the trend graph is shifted right.

To place a single-page Trend Display:

1) Click the Trend Display icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

151

Page 154: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Page type: Select Single page. Single page is a simple trend display. Data is plotted as described in the above example.

Sampling time: Time between point plots in seconds.

Plot point: the number of sample points displayed across the length of the chart.

Read address: Specify the PLC word address of the first trend data, the second trend data starts at read address + 1, and the third starts at read address + 2, etc.

No. of Channel: The number of PLC data words retrieved is the same as No. of Channel, one word per channel.

3) Fill in the Trend Tab: Select the appropriate Channel to view each channel’s settings.

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Trend Display.

Pen attribute: Specify the Trend Color and pen thickness for each channel.

Value: Set the zero and span for each channel.

4) Click OK, position and resize the Trend Display as desired.

To place a multiple-page Trend Display:

1) Click the Trend Display icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

152

Page 155: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Page type: Select Multiple pages. Multiple pages allows a trend display to be extended. Data is plotted as before but it is not lost after it is scrolled off of the trend. The data is held in memory for review up to the number of pages (31 maximum) specified by the No. of page dropdown.

Hold style: Determines how the trend reacts when the hold bit is activated. Hold trend display simply prevents further updates until the Hold bit is turned off. Hold trend display & clear stops the trend update and clears out all pages of the trend.

Attribute: Start from left selects to have the trend pens start from the left and traverse the display before scrolling begins. Start from the right begins the pens scrolling from right to left from the first sample onwards.

Sampling time: Time between point plots in seconds.

Plot point: the number of sample points displayed across the length of the chart.

Read address: Specify the PLC word address of the first trend data pen, the second trend data pen starts at read address + 1, and the third starts at read address + 2, etc.

No. of Channel: The number of PLC data words retrieved is the same as No. of Channel, one word per channel.

Scroll control: The address of the register that determines which portion of the multiple page display is being shown on the screen. Each increment of the value in the scroll register moves the trend display one sample plot to the left.

Hold control: The bit that controls the trend update. See Hold style above.

153

Page 156: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Fill in the Trend Tab:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Trend Display.

Select the “Channel to view each channel’s settings.

Pen attribute: Specify the Trend Color and pen thickness for the channel.

Value: Set the zero and span for each channel.

4) Click OK, position and resize the Trend Display as desired.

154

Page 157: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.19 Bar Graph

The Bar Graph displays PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value as defined by the SPAN and ZERO settings.

To place a Bar Graph:

1) Click the Bar Graph icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Bar Graph

Read Address: First word of 3 possible that that are used to control a Bar Graph display.

Data Format: BIN or BCD as described previously in Word Lamp.

No. of words: Restricted to 1 or 3. Three words are needed when variable alarm is selected. The Bar Graph will retrieve three continuous data words, one for data and two for high and low alarm limits. One word is needed when fixed alarm is selected.

155

Page 158: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Go to Bar Graph Tab:

Here the direction, fix/variable alarm, colors and range of bar graph are defined.

Direction: Up, Down, Left and Right.

Fix/Variable alarm: Variable alarm is

Yes: the high and low alarm limit will be retrieved from PLC data registers as described below.

No: the high and low alarm limit is set in the “Value field.

Variable Alarm YES NO

Read Address Bar graph data Bar graph data

Read Address+1 Low alarm --

Read Address+2 High alarm -- Color: Set bar, background, frame and bar (in alarm) color.

Value: The filled bar percentage is calculated as follows:

Percentage of filled bar = [ (Reading value – Zero) * 100% ] / (Span – Zero)

Low/High alarm limit: If “Variable alarm is No, the high and low alarm limits are entered here.

4) Position the Bar Graph and resize it if necessary.

156

Page 159: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.20 Meter

The Meter displays PLC register data as an angular indicator in proportion to its value as defined by the SPAN and ZERO setting.

Indicator

Scale

Shape

A traditional meter may be composed of three types of parts.

To place a Meter:

1) Click the Meter icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Meter.

Read Address: PLC word that display its value.

Data Format: BIN or BCD as described previously in Word Lamp.

No. of words: One word only.

157

Page 160: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Go to Meter Tab:

Color: set indicator color.

Value: The meter percentage (relative to 180° for Half circle and 360° for Full circle) is calculated as follows:

Percentage of angleθ = [(Register value – Zero) / (Span – Zero)] * 100%

4) Position the Meter and resize it if necessary.

158

Page 161: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.21 Alarm Bar

The Alarm Bar sets aside a window to display messages registered in the Alarm Scan list via alarm conditions. The messages are scrolled from right to left in order of triggering. Alarms continue to scroll until they switch to the inactive state.

Example of an Alarm Display:

A Shape (SP_0) is used for the background rectangle. Some TEXT is placed on the Shape to identify what is being displayed. The actual Alarm Display part is placed on top of the shape. The alarm messages appear in the Alarm Display.

SHAPE

Display at run time scrolling an alarm.

TEXT

ALARM DISPLAY

To add an Alarm Bar:

1) Click the Alarm Bar icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

159

Page 162: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Alarm Bar.

Display line: Specifies the height of the window in lines at one message per line. Only the top line displays messages. All messages are displayed in font size according to the setting in alarm scan.

Char. length: Specifies the width of the window in characters. Due to scrolling messages are never truncated as in the Alarm Display.

3) Click OK and position the Alarm Bar where desired.

160

Page 163: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.22 Recipe Transfer

The Recipe Transfer part activates the transfer of a block of contiguous registers from the PowerView to the PLC or from the PLC to the PowerView. PowerView storage address is determined by an internal word (see note below).

To create a Recipe Transfer part:

1) Click the Recipe Transfer icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Recipe Transfer.

Write Address: specify the start address of a continuous block of PLC registers where recipe data was transferred to or saved from the PLC.

No. of words: the number of registers will be transferred.

Attribute: Select Download to move data from the PowerView recipe memory to the PLC. Select Save to transfer data from the PLC to the PowerView recipe memory.

3) Go to Shape Tab: Select Shape or Bitmap to represent the touch area.

4) Go to Label Tab: Fill in text to denote states, if desired.

5) Click OK, position the part and resize it if necessary.

CAUTION: Registers RW10000 and LW9000 are used as pointers for internal memory recipe transfer purposes. By varying these addresses, many recipes can be stored in RW memory and downloaded or saved as needed.

161

Page 164: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

For example, suppose the PLC has 5 registers, which are parameters for machine operation (a recipe). These five registers need to be changed depending on the part of process the machine is to run. There are four different set-ups required. The 4 set-ups are set in the PowerView at internal register values RW200, RW210, RW220 and RW230. Set-up 1 can be downloaded by putting the value 200 in internal register RW10000. By pressing a Recipe Transfer button that has the Download attribute, the Recipe at 200 is downloaded. Set-up 2 can be downloaded by putting the value 210 in internal register RW10000 and then pressing the Recipe Transfer button that has the Download attribute, and so on. Setting the value in LW9000 to 3 and pressing a Recipe Transfer button that transfers only one register can download parameter 3 alone of recipe 210.

NOTE: Use RW words for all Recipe Transfer functions. The range is RW00000 to RW59999.

System Bits used for Recipe Transfer:

LB9010 indicates when a download is in progress: Download Active (ON) or Not Downloaded (OFF).

LB9011 indicates when an upload is in progress: Uploading Active (ON) or Not Uploading (OFF).

LB9012 indicates if the PowerView is Downloading (ON) or Uploading (OFF).

System Words used for Recipe Transfer:

RW10000 pointer to Recipe memory: Downloads and uploads begin at the address number in RW10000.

LW9000 Offset Pointer to Recipe memory: Downloads and uploads begin at the RWI address with an offset number that is in LW9000.

PowerView Recipe Function

The recipe memory resides in battery backed up SRAM and therefore the contents of memory will be preserved for at least half a year after power off. The battery is recharged whenever the system is powered up. The total size of recipe memory is 64K words. The recipe memory is addressed by “RW” for absolute address or “RWI” for indexed address.

RW0 RW1 RW2 … RW65534 RW65535

When the recipe memory is accessed by index address, the index address is offset from its indicated address by the content of LW9000. For examples if (LW9000)= 50, then an index address RWI 100 physically accesses the data at address RW 150 (100+50).

The following screen illustrates the way to enter the data into recipe memory:

Recipe Name : AD_01 [ RWI 0 ]

Set Time 1 : NI_01 [ RWI 5 ] Set Temp 1 : NI_05 [ RWI 9 ]

162

Page 165: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Set Time 2 : NI_02 [ RWI 6 ] Set Temp 2 : NI_06 [ RWI 10 ]

Set Time 3 : NI_03 [ RWI 7 ] Set Press. : NI_07 [ RWI 11 ]

Cycle : NI_04 [ RWI 8 ]

Select Recipe : SW_01 [ LW 9000 ]

Each recipe is composed of 12 words:

Word 0~4: recipe name (10 ASCII characters)

Word 5~11: recipe data

Where AD_nn designates ASCII data and NI_nn designates Numeric Input, both use index address (RWI nn) to access recipe memory. The SW_01 (Set Word part) steps LW9000 to the next word of data. By incrementing with SW_01, the Numeric Input part NI_01 ~ 07 will access each recipe and you may input data into each recipe memory as desired.

The Recipe Transfer part can now be used to download the recipe data designated by LW9000 to a continuous block of PLC registers or vice versa. The size of data transferred is configurable as explained above.

163

Page 166: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3.23 Event Display

The Event Display part opens a window to display messages in prioritized order. Various formatting features allow the display of event trigger, acknowledge and return to normal times. The use of the Real Time Clock is required for proper display of the time.

To create an Event Display part:

1) Click the Event Display icon.

2) Fill in General Tab Items:

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Event Display.

Read Address: Controls the scrolling, up and down, of the Event display window. All active messages are sorted by time with the new events displayed on top and the older ones on the bottom. If the register value is N, the number N message of the order of arrival is placed on the first line of the display window.

Write Address: A word that receives the write value specified by the triggered event. The value is set when editing event messages in the Event Log, see “Event Scan part.

No. of words is fixed at one for both the Read and the Write addresses.

164

Page 167: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3) Fill in Event Display Tab Items:

Display line: Specifies the height of the window in lines at one message per line.

Char. length: Specifies the width of the window in characters. Characters past this length will be truncated.

Text space: The number of pixels between two lines of messages.

Acknowledge style: Click is touch once, Double click is touch twice quickly. Used to put a select box around the message, write the preset value to “Write address” and acknowledge the message.

Color: Defines the color of message text for different states of event messages. The select box is a box composed of a dashed line indicating which message the user has selected.

Format: The information displayed before the message. Times are displayed in HH:MM:SS format.

Format Item Description Sequence No. The number of the event. Event numbering starts at 0. Acknowledge time The time that the message was acknowledged. Event Trig. time The time that the message was triggered. Return to normal time The time at which the conditions causing the event returned to a non-

triggering state. (Hours: Minutes: Seconds) Extended time format (D:H:M) Change the time format in the time tag to Days:Hours:Minutes. Short time format: (H:M) Change the time format in the time tag to Hours:Minutes. Happen Date (M:D) The date when the conditions causing the event occurred. (Month:Day) Extended date format (Y:M:D) Change the date format in the date tag to Year:Month:Day.

165

Page 168: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Be sure to allow sufficient character length to accommodate all information. If the Format information and message text exceeds the Character length, the message is truncated.

4) Click OK and position the part.

Where the time of date retrieved is the setting in RTC source on the System Parameter General Tab. If RTC source is set as “Internal RTC” then the recipe memory card must be installed since the internal RTC is located in the recipe memory. If Local Word is select then the user must use a Data Transfer part to periodically send data to the RTC local word as follows:

Address Description Range (all BCD format)

LW 9010 second 0 – 59

LW 9011 minute 0 – 59

LW 9012 hour 0 – 23

LW 9013 day 0 – 31

LW 9014 month 0 – 11

LW 9015 year 0 – 9999

LW 9016 week 0 – 6

166

Page 169: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.24 Data Transfer

This part is used to transfer a block of data from the PLC to the PowerView unit or from the PowerView unit to the PLC periodically. Data Transfer functions are always active no matter which window is being displayed on the screen.

To create a Data Transfer function:

1) Click Data Transfer icon to pop up the Data Transfer summary screen.

2) Click on the Add button to create a new Data Transfer function or click on the Modify icon to modify an existing Data Transfer function. If you click on the Delete button, the current highlighted function is deleted.

167

Page 170: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Assign proper options in the Data Transfer Object dialog box.

Description: A reference name (not displayed) that you assign to the Data Transfer.

Source address: The address of the bit or word that begins the block of data to transfer.

Destination Address: The address of bit or word that begins the block that receives the data.

Attribute: Make a selection in the Address mode to transfer Bit or Word data. Number of Bits/Words is the number of consecutive bits or words to transfer. The Interval selection is the frequency rate (0.0 to 3.0 seconds) at which the block transfer is repeated. An Interval of 0.0 transfers the data once at power up.

Click OK when done.

4) Click Close when all desired Data Transfer functions have been programmed.

168

Page 171: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.25 Event Log

Event Log Messages are displayed on the Event Display Part. The message to be displayed on the Event Display must first be registered in the Event Log list. A PLC bit or word device controls each message. If the PLC bit or word device activates (either ON/OFF or value limit), the corresponding message is displayed on the Event Display.

To add/modify Event Log messages:

1) Click the Event Log icon to display the Event Log message summary screen.

2) Select Add button to add a new message or Modify button to modify an existing message.

3) Fill in Attributes Dialog:

Address type: Select Bit or Word address type.

Read Address: Specifies the PLC bit or word address that triggers the message.

169

Page 172: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Event Trig.:

Bits: - ON: displays message when bit is ON. OFF: displays message when bit is OFF.

Words: Use the “<” symbol to trigger the display when the word value is less than the entered value. Use the “>” symbol to trigger the display when the word value is greater than the preset value.

Print –

On Trig.: prints out message when event is triggered.

Return to normal: prints out message when the event returns to normal state.

Category: event category (reserved for future use)

Text: Enter the Content , Color and the Font size of messages.

Data from internal memory can be embedded in an Event message. To embed a value use the following format.

%nnd

Where: “% is the starting delimiter; “nn is the internal register (LW) number 00-99; and “d is the ending delimiter.

For example: The content is set as "Current temperature value %25d : HIGH ALARM"

If LW25 = 120 then the message will be printed out as "Current temperature value 120 : HIGH ALARM".

To print out current value of PLC register data, you should first assign a "DF" data transfer object to move data from the PLC to internal (LW) memory.

Write Value: The value written to the “WRITE ADDRESS of the Event Display part. It is quite useful to use the “WRITE ADDRESS of Event Display to control an Indirect Window, therefore when operator touch an event log message the corresponding window will be popped up.

4) Click OK, the message appears in Event log message summary box.

NOTE: In order to take full use of communication bandwidth, it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit devices be used for the Event Log list. For example: Use Bits 100 to 199 to control the display of all event messages. In this case, one read command retrieves Bits100 to 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time.

170

Page 173: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.26 PLC Control

The PLC Control activates a specific operation whenever the corresponding control device is triggered.

To create a PLC control function:

1) Click the PLC control icon to pop up the PLC control summary screen.

2) Click on the Add icon to create a new PLC control function or click on the Modify icon to modify an existing PLC control function. If you click on the Delete icon, the current pointed function is deleted.

171

Page 174: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

3) Assign proper options in the PLC control function dialog box.

Read Address: Assign the address of the PLC control device. This must be a WORD address.

Type of control: Assign the operation activated by this function.

Change Window: This operation uses two continuous addresses. At the time the content of ReadAddr is changed to a valid window number current screen will terminate and change to display designated window, then the destination window number will be written to the PLC address ReadAddr+1.

ReadAddr Control change window

ReadAddr + 1 Destination window number is written

Back light control: This operation uses a bit to control the ON/OFF status of backlight, when the bit is ON the backlight is ON and when the bit is OFF the backlight is OFF too.

Screen hardcopy: This operation uses a bit to control the printout of the current display screen. If the bit is triggered from OFF to ON then the current display screen will be printout. The “printer type” in the System Parameter > General Tab screen must be set to the appropriate printer type.

Report printout: This operation uses a word device to control the printout of a specified window. When the content of word device is written a valid window number, the content of the window will be printout. The display of the screen will not be influence in this operation.

Back light control (write back): Turns the display's backlight OFF when the Read address turns ON (positive edge triggered). Whenever the backlight is turned OFF

172

Page 175: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

(through PLC control or time-out) the PowerView turns the Read address bit OFF in the PLC. When the backlight is OFF, a touch reactivates the backlight.

Write data to PLC (current base window): The active base window number is written to the Read address. Pop-up windows do not have their number written to the Read address.

General PCL control: Basic PCL control object.

Execute macro program: Select this option to initiate a defined macro program.

Macro ID: Select the Macro ID that identifies the macro program you wish to run when the specified address is manipulated.

4) Click the OK button to create the object and exit the PLC control object dialog.

5) Click the OK button to exit the PLC Control summary.

NOTE: Change window

At any time, the PV unit will display a window. It is possible to register several window pop-up parts (see Indirect Window and Direct Window Parts) on a window. Each window pop-up part, when activated, will display a specified window. Whenever a “change window” function key is pressed, the current display will terminate and clear, and the new destination window will be displayed on the screen. The function of PLC control with "change window" is similar to the above operation, except it is triggered by a PLC register instead of a touch operation. When the read address is changed to a new valid window number, the current display will terminate, clear up and display the window as designated by read address, and the content of read address will be written to read address+1 by the PV. The operation is triggered only when value of read address changed and it take only one change screen operation each time value changed.

173

Page 176: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

174

Page 177: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.27 System Message

It’s possible to customize system messages for different languages. There are three possible system messages that can be displayed:

“PLC no response” – Displayed when the PowerView unit cannot access the PLC.

“PLC response error” – Displayed when the reply message from the PLC is different from expected.

“System severe error” - Generated when the system runs out of memory or some other fatal error occurs.

To modify system messages:

1) Click the System Message icon to pop up the system message dialog box.

2) Fill in appropriate text on the content of each message to customize it.

3) Click OK to finish the modification.

175

Page 178: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

176

Page 179: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.28 Alarm Scan

Alarm Messages are displayed on the Alarm Display part. The message to be displayed on the Alarm Display must first be registered in the Alarm Scan list. A PLC bit device controls each message. If the PLC bit device activates (either ON or OFF) and the corresponding message is displayed on the Alarm Display.

To add/modify an alarm message:

1) Click the Alarm Scan icon to display the Alarm Scan object message summary screen.

2) Select Add button to add a new message or Modify button to modify an existing message.

3) Fill in Attributes dialog.

Read address: Specifies the control device address that triggers the message.

Alarm ON: Displays this message when the bit is ON. OFF displays this message when bit if OFF.

Category: Alarm category (reserved for future use)

Text: Enter the message Condition text, text Color and Font size.

Click OK, the message appears in the Alarm Scan message summary box.

4) Click OK and position as necessary.

177

Page 180: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

In order to make full use of communication bandwidth, it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit devices be used for the Alarm Scan list. For example: Use Bits 100 to 199 to control the display of all messages. In this case, one read command retrieves Bits 100 to 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time.

178

Page 181: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3.29 XY Plot

Periodically retrieves a group of PLC register data and displays as an XY curve on the screen.

Procedure to add a XY Plot:

1. Click the XY Plot icon.

2. Fill in General Tab Items:

Page type: Select Single page or Multiple pages.

Sampling time: Time between point plots in seconds.

Hold style: Determines how the trend reacts when the hold bit is activated. Hold trend display simply prevents further updates until the Hold bit is turned off. Hold trend display & clear stops the trend update and clears out all pages of the trend.

Sampling time: Time between point plots in seconds.

Plot point: the number of sample points displayed across the length of the chart.

Read address: Specify the PLC word address of data. [Read Addr] = X position [Read Addr + 1] = Y position

Scroll control: The address of the register that determines which portion of the multiple page display is being shown on the screen. Each increment of the value in the scroll register moves the chart display one sample plot to the left.

Hold control: The bit that controls the chart update. See Hold style above.

3. Fill in the Plot Tab:

The “Channel” no use. XY Plot only supports one channel.

Description: A reference name (not displayed)

179

Page 182: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Pen attribute: Specify the XY curve color

Value: Set the zero and span for horizontal and vertical.

4. Click OK, position and resize the XY Plot display as desired.

180

Page 183: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Chapter 4: Drawing

181

Page 184: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4.1 Line/Rectangle/Circle/Ellipse/Arc/Polygon

The available drawing tools are, from left to right:

Line

Rectangle

Circle/Ellipse

Arc

Text

Bitmap

Scale

Polygon

Shape

The illustration below shows examples of Line, Rectangle, Circle/Ellipse, Arc, and Polygon. (The other tools are explained in their own help topics.)

182

Page 185: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

When drawing these objects, the following attribute dialog box is displayed:

Frame: The Frame attributes are used to set how the lines for the object will be displayed.

Select Line types – Choose one of the eight selections for the line or frame width.

Select Line colors – Select a color from the 256-color selection (See below) for the line.

Interior: The Interior attributes are for objects that can be filled. For objects that can not be filled this option is disabled. The filled attributes are not displayed unless the Filled check box is checked.

If the Filled option is selected, the following attributes can be set for Rectangle, Circle and Polygon.

Select Interior colors: Select a color from the 256-color selection (see below).

Select pattern: Choose one of the 26 different patterns available.

Select pattern colors: Select a color from the 256-color selection (see below).

183

Page 186: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Color Options

Color window pops up when color selection dropdown key is activated. One of the standard colors may be chosen or click on Customize color to access a full spectrum of color options.

184

Page 187: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4.2 Text Click on the text icon to display the following text dialog box:

Font: A variety of font sizes are available: 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 72 and 96

Alignment (Justification): When the text input for a Label becomes two lines or more, the alignment can be defined left, right or centered.

Color: Text color may be chosen from the 32 “basic”, or most commonly used, colors, while the “customized” palette allows the user to choose from an expanded color selection.

Content: Type in the characters to be displayed on the button. Press the “Enter” key to force a new line if necessary.

Editing Tools: Once the text has been placed, the toolbar text editing tools can be used to change font size and justification.

185

Page 188: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4.3 Bitmap This part places a static Bitmap graphics on the screen.

186

Page 189: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4.4 Scale The Scale is used with bar graph, meter or trend parts as an indicator. The Scale can be either horizontal, vertical or curve.

To place a Scale:

1) Click the Scale icon.

2) Drag to the desired size.

3) Click on the Edit icon.

4) Fill in Style Tab.

Frame: Select the color and line style to be used for the Scale.

Scale: Select the style to be displayed: horizontal, vertical or curved. Select the number of divisions on the scale (Range is 1 to 255).

5) Fill in Profile tab to numerically adjust size if necessary.

6) Click OK and position if necessary.

187

Page 190: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4.5 Shape This part places a static shape on the screen.

188

Page 191: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Chapter 5: Development Environment Settings

189

Page 192: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

5.1 Grid/Snap Grid points are simply points placed at regular intervals on your screen, that divide it into coordinates for your drawing area. Use the grid point spacing command to adjust the density of the points, and set the grid to either display or be hidden. Also, note that the grid points are not shown on the PowerView unit display.

From the Option menu, select Grid/Snap:

Spacing: Enter the desired grid point spacing here. The units are pixels. Input the interval value for X and Y axes, respectively. The default setting is 20 pixels.

Display: Set the grid point display state (display or do not display)

Snap: When the snap check box is checked, the snap function becomes valid. The mouse’s cursor position is then fixed according to the screen’s grid points, relieving you of the need to make repeated find position adjustments.

Fix objects: When the Fix objects check box is checked, objects added to the screen cannot be relocated after placement. Objects can be moved once the check in this check box is removed.

190

Page 193: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

5.2 Window Property setting Use this dialog to customize the screen display environment.

From the Option menu, select Window Property:

Grid color: Select the grid point color.

Object ID: Designates whether or not Part ID numbers are displayed on the screen.

Using Function Key to make Shape Library: Check this box if the need is to create a shape that will stay in proportion once saved to the Shape Library. This is typical for shapes that aren’t square in proportions. With this box checked the programmer is able to create a new shape, surround that shape or combination of shapes with a Function Key (with no shape or bitmap assigned), select it and save it to the Shape Library. This shape is then saved in the normally square Function Key with its original proportions.

This check box only needs to be activated for the window in which these new shapes will be created and saved. Once saved these shapes can be used on any window, even if this Window Property isn’t selected.

191

Page 194: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

On the left is the shape inserted without the Function Key overlay. It is inserted and appears squat. On the right is the shape created with the Function Key overlay. It retains the original proportions.

Jump to application mode when download done: Within the Window Property, the user can select this checkbox if the desired effect is for the downloaded project to enter Application Mode when download is complete. Without this feature, the user must complete the download step and then change from Download Mode to Application Mode.

Automatic save and compile at download and simulate: Within the Window Property, the user can select this checkbox if the desired effect is to press either the simulate or download buttons and have the save and compile step occur automatically.

192

Page 195: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

5.3 Language ViewBuilder supports several different languages. To use a specific language, the ViewBuilder software must be installed under the proper version of Window 95/98. For example, to support Chinese(Taiwan) ViewBuilder must be installed under Win95/98 Chinese(Taiwan) version. Also specific font files must be installed separately from the ViewBuilder installation diskette.

NOTE: Nematron’s current version of ViewBuilder software supports English and European character sets only. Please notify us if you need Asian character sets.

After you complete the above procedure, from the Option menu click Language and select the appropriate language.

193

Page 196: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Chapter 6: Editing Placed Objects

194

Page 197: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

6.1 Moving and resizing objects

6.1.1 Selecting objects

To move drawing objects, use the pointer to select the object or drag a rectangle around a group of objects. Then press the appropriate direction key on the keyboard to move the object up, down, left, or right one pixel at a time.

Three methods are available for selecting objects: 1) clicking on an object directly, or 2) dragging the mouse to enclose and select multiple objects, or 3) using the pull down menu Edit > Select all objects to select all the objects on the screen.

Excluding objects from selection

When multiple objects are selected, move the cursor over the object you wish to deselect, hold down the Ctrl key and click the objects.

Adding objects to selection

Move the cursor over the object you wish to add to the selection, hold down the Ctrl key and click the objects.

Once an object is placed on the window, its position can be set to a numerical position through the profile tag of the Attributes dialog for that part (object). Click on the Edit icon and adjust the Profile Tab settings as desired.

6.1.2 Nudging objects

To move objects just a few pixels at a time, select the object(s) and then click the appropriate nudge icon (up, down, left or right), or select Edit > Nudge from the toolbar menu.

6.1.3 Aligning objects

To align several objects, select the object(s) and then click the appropriate alignment icon, or select the desired Edit > Align option from the toolbar menu. Objects can be aligned to the left, horizontally centered, to the right, to the top, vertically centered, or to the bottom.

6.1.4 Scaling objects

195

Page 198: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

To make several objects the same size in width or height, just select the objects and click the appropriate scaling icon (Make Same Width, Make Same Height, or Make Same Size). All objects are scaled to the most recently created object in the selected group.

6.1.5 Grouping and ungrouping objects

This function can be used to group multiple objects, causing them to behave like a single object. To group several objects, select the objects and click the Group Objects button.

To ungroup all objects of a group, select the group and click the Ungroup Objects button.

6.1.6 Flipping and rotating objects

Shapes can be flipped horizontally, vertically, or rotated 90 degrees using the transformation tools.

6.1.7 Arranging objects

When objects overlap each other, you can change the order of the layers. Select the object you wish to move and then click the appropriate Arrange Object button to bring the object to the Top layer, Bottom layer, one layer up, or one layer down respectively.

6.1.8 Changing text size and alignment

When a text string is selected, you can change the font size by selecting from the font size dropdown list, or change the text alignment (if more than two lines of text) by clicking on the left justify, center, or right justify icon.

6.1.9 Cutting, copying and pasting objects

One or more objects can be cut, copied, or imported from the clipboard by selecting and clicking on the appropriate icon displayed above.

6.1.10 Undo

Click on this icon to cancel the previous operation.

196

Page 199: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

6.1.11 Redo

Click on the redo icon to re-establish an operation eliminated by the Undo function.

197

Page 200: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

6.2 Editing Object Attributes

6.2.1 Changing Attributes

To change the attributes of an object, simply select the object and double-click to display the attribute dialog.

6.2.2 Editing Stacked Objects

When several objects are placed on top of one another or are overlapping, selecting one of them for editing can be a challenge. To select an object in a stack, click to highlight the top object. If this is not the desired object, click on the Select tool to “tunnel” down to the object that needs editing. Once the desired object is highlighted, right click or click on the Edit tool to edit the object.

6.2.3 Editing Grouped Object Attributes

To edit the attributes of objects that have been grouped, click on the group, or select multiple objects by dragging a rectangle around them.

1) Click on the Edit icon. This action calls up a dialog that allows you to select the item to edit. Editing in this fashion will only allow editing of the “General” tab attributes.

198

Page 201: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2) Right-click on the group to bring up a pop-up menu displaying basic edit functions and object ID numbers. To check the attributes of a specific object, select the appropriate object ID number, right-click to display the pop-up menu again, and select Attribute.

199

Page 202: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

6.3 Using the Window No. Treebar The Window Treebar is used during design time to call up and view Windows and window Objects. To activate the Treebar, select View Window No. Treebar, or simply press the Tab key. The Treebar will appear to the left of the design window.

Click on any Window number to quickly bring it forward on the screen. Double-click on any closed Window number to open the Window for design.

Click and drag the right frame to resize the width of the Treebar.

Select a tree window and right-click the mouse to pop-up a shortcut menu. This menu gives a quick way to create a new window, open an existing window, close an open window, delete a window from the project or edit a window’s settings.

Click on the Objects tab to view all of the objects on the Window number being displayed.

200

Page 203: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Click on the ID number in the Objects Treebar to highlight the object in the design window. The object can then be positioned or edited as desired.

201

Page 204: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Chapter 7: Project Management and Documentation

202

Page 205: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

7.1 Compressing and Decompressing a project Project compression is an easy way to archive a project and its associated libraries. To access the compression utility all projects must be closed. When all projects are closed, a reduced menu bar is displayed. The Tool menu will show two options: Compress and Decompile.

Select the Compress menu item to compress a project along with all of the libraries used in that project into a single file. The extension used for compressed files is *.cmp. Decompression can be used to extract a project and its libraries at a later time. If the original libraries or project data is lost, then can be recovered by uncompressing the archived project.

Use the Browse feature to find the project to compress. The Destination name is automatically assigned. This name can be changed by the user.

Click on the Compressing button to begin the compression process.

NOTE: The same procedure is used for uncompressing a file.

203

Page 206: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

7.2 Decompiling a project The Decompile tool is used to create a project from a *.eob file. The *.eob file may be from a compiled project or an upload out of a unit. When the Decompile option is selected, all windows and their objects will be converted back into a project file. Because window and objects names are not retained during the compile process, they are assigned default names in the derived project.

Browse for the project you wish to decompile. The Destination name is automatically assigned, but can be changed.

Click on the Decompile button to begin the decompile process.

204

Page 207: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

7.3 Converting a project to a Downloadable Binary On Nematron PowerView/E models equipped with the top-loading CompactFlash® card slot, you have the option to load finished programs directly from a memory card rather than via serial communications as described earlier in this manual. The advantage of program loading from a memory card is that when your project is completely developed and debugged, you can quickly and easily load it onto multiple PowerView units without manually connecting to each one.

In order to load a project from a CompactFlash memory card, you must first convert the compiled project (.eob file) into a downloadable binary (.bin file):

1) Find and launch the ImageCF.exe utility in the ViewBuilder program directory – from the Start menu, select Programs > ViewBuilder > ImageCF. The ImageCF panel will appear.

2) Click the "magnifying glass" button to get an Open File dialog, then browse for the compiled project (.eob file) you want to convert.

3) Click Open to select the project. The project will be shown in the ImageCF panel.

205

Page 208: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

4) Click the "yellow arrow" button to convert the project into a downloadable binary. The file is automatically saved in the ViewBuilder program directory with the name ImageCF.BIN, as shown in the ImageCF panel.

The downloadable binary is now ready to be copied to a CompactFlash memory card.

5) Click the X button to close the ImageCF panel.

For further instructions on how to load the binary from the memory card onto the PowerView unit, please refer to the Nematron PowerView & PowerView/E Installation Guide (DOC-IWS-671) that was packaged with the unit.

206

Page 209: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

7.4 Documenting a project Project documentation is done through the ViewWindow Utility. Run the project with Offline Simulator to bring up the ViewWindow display. Right-click on the display to pop-up the following menu if it is not already displayed at the top of the window.

Select Emulator setting from the menu. Check the ALL objects check box. Then click on the check boxes on the right side of the dialog to have various object information displayed in the simulation. Click OK.

207

Page 210: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

7.4.1 Printing screens

From within simulation mode, go to the screen you would like to print. Right-click to bring up the menu and select Print Screen. Note that Print Screen Preview is available for review of the final document. In addition, the Print Screen to File option is available. Please note that only one screen at a time can be printed.

7.4.2 Printing object assignments

Select Print Window from the menu. Select the Image radio button to print the highlighted screen. Select the Table radio button to print a table of objects on the screen. Check the Alarm text box if you would like active alarms printed with the Table. Click OK.

208

Page 211: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Chapter 8: System Information

209

Page 212: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.1 System Bit and Register Reference

8.1.1 Local Memory

Local memory resides in DRAM and every value is initialized to zero at system start-up. The PV is equipped with the following memory ranges:

LB0000 ~ 9999 (Bit devices) Segmented in groups of 16-bits as follows:

LB 15~0 LB 31~16 LB 47~32 **** LB 9983~9968 LB 9999~9984

LW0000 ~ 9999 (Word devices)

LW0 LW1 LW2 **** LW9998 LW9999

Each LBnnnn is a 1-bit device and each LWnnnn is a 16-bit device.

The Local word addresses above LW9000 is reserved for system use only.

210

Page 213: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.1.2 Reserved Words/Bits

Some Local Words, Local Bits and Recipe Words are reserved for special purposes. Users should not use these areas except for their released purposes.

Local Bits: 9000~9999 are reserved

Local Words: 9000~9999 are reserved

Recipe Words: 60000~65535 are reserved

Reserved Local Bits

LB Address

Description Note

9000~9009 Initialized as ON Use these bits for some objects that need initial set as ON.

9010 Recipe download indicator Set ON when downloading Set OFF when download is done

Use this bit to indicate when recipe download is in progress.

9011 Recipe upload indicator Set ON when uploading Set OFF when uploading is done

Use this bit to indicate when recipe upload is in progress.

9012 Recipe download/upload indicator Set ON when transferring data Set OFF when transfer is done

Use this bit to indicate when recipe transfer is in progress.

9013 WREVADDR_BIT_TASKBAR_TOUCH Write 1 to display “touch indicator” 9014 WREVADDR_BIT_TASKBAR_CPU Write 1 to display “CPU indicator” 9015 WREVADDR_BIT_TASKBAR_ALARM Write 1 to display “alarm indicator” 9016 WREVADDR_BIT_PRINT_ERROR Changes to 1 when printing fails 9017 WREVADDR_BIT_PRINT_ON_OFF Write 1 to disable print functions.

Write 0 to enable print functions. *Setting in System Parameters must have printer enabled or Bit 9017 doesn’t have any effect.

9020 Pen (write ON when pen selected) Message board use (read/write) 9021 Brush (write ON when brush selected) Message board use (read/write) 9022 Clipping (write ON when clipping

selected) Message board use (read/write)

9030 Pen width pixel 1 Message board use (read/write) 9031 Pen width pixel 2 Message board use (read/write)

211

Page 214: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

LB Address

Description Note

9032 Pen width pixel 3 Message board use (read/write) 9040 Hide/Show Fast select screen Write 1 to hide

Write 0 to show (read/write)

9041 Hide/Show TaskBar Write 1 to hide Write 0 to show (read/write)

9042 Hide/Show TaskButton Write 1 to hide Write 0 to show (read/write)

9043 Hide/Show All (Fast select screen, Taskbar, TaskButton)

Write 1 to hide Write 0 to show (read/write)

9050 Toshiba T/C write control bit When this bit ON, write T/C as On or OFF T1/T1S user’s manual NOTE: In case of Timer/Counter register write, the T/C device data (2 bytes each) corresponding to the T/C’s register should be added. If the T/C’s device is set to ON, it should be ‘01’. Otherwise, it should be ‘00’. (read/write)

9051 Control touch enable or disable when Backlight is turned OFF

Write 1 to disable touch screen when Backlight is turned OFF. (read/write)

9052 Disable write back in PLC Control/change window

Write 1 to disable write back to PLC. This applies to change window controls only!! (read/write)

9055 Disconnect action – PLC communications When PV is disconnected from the PLC, it will act according to the state of local bit 9055. 0: Any write to PLC command will be killed. 1: Any write to PLC command will be continuously retried.

212

Page 215: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

LB Address

Description Note

9056 Disconnection action – Touch When PV is disconnected from the PLC, it will act according to the content of local bit 9056. 0: enable touch 1: disable touch

9060 Keypad control bit, left side (of window) PV writes this bit ON whenever a user activates an input data object (NE or AE), and writes OFF if input is valid or ESC key is pressed. User can use this bit to control Keypad pop-up. Keypad window will be closed if input succeeds. (read only)

9061 Keypad control bit, left side (read only) 9062 Keypad control bit, left and top side (read only) 9063 Keypad control bit, left and bottom side (read only) 9064 Keypad control bit, right side (read only) 9065 Keypad control bit, right side (read only) 9066 Keypad control bit, right and top side (read only) 9067 Keypad control bit, right and bottom side (read only) 9068 Keypad control bit, all side (read only) 9069 Keypad control bit, all side (read only)

213

Page 216: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Reserved Local Words

LW Address

Description Note

9000 Recipe index base (R/W) RelRCP_W and RelRCP_B use this index to access recipe data

9002~9003 Set Numeric Input to Max value when numeric input gets the focus.

Numeric Input displays its maximum value when activated. When Numeric Input loses the focus it is set to zero.

9004~9005 Set Numeric Input to Min value when numeric input gets the focus.

Numeric Input displays its minimum value when activated. When Numeric Input loses the focus it is set to zero.

9006 White board mode 0: pen 1: brush 2: clipping

Whiteboard used (read)

9007 Pen width 0: 1 pixel 1: 2 pixels 2: 3 pixels

Whiteboard used (read)

9008 Pen Color 0 – 255 Whiteboard used (read/write)

9010 Local second BCD code, value values: 0 – 59 (read/write allow)

9011 Local minute BCD code, value values: 0 – 59 (read/write allow)

9012 Local hour BCD code, value values: 0 – 23 (read/write allow)

9013 Local day BCD code, value values: 0 – 31 (read/write allow)

9014 Local month BCD code, value values: 0 – 11 (read/write allow)

9015 Local year BCD code, value values: 0 – 9999 (read/write allow)

9016 Local week BCD code, value values: 0 – 6 (read/write allow)

214

Page 217: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

LW Address

Description Note

9020 Object queue, item number If a screen’s object queue exceeds 1000, then the PV screen is too complex. PLC communication speed controls the update speed. If local data causes a slow update, it is suggested that the window design be changed. Note: ViewWindow has a tool called “SystemResource that is reached using the right mouse button. It displays object queue item numbers. The PC that is running the simulation may have more CPU speed, more caches, and more video speed. So the project operating in the simulated mode may not exhibit the slowdown symptoms.

9034 System time (unit as 0.1 second)

(read/write)

9040~9041 Security password Double word (write only)

9042 Security level (read only) 9043 Force security level (write only) 9044 Touch process mode

When a momentary switch is pressed (touch down) , the related bit is set ON. If there is any window pop-up that hides the momentary switch before it is released, the bit will remain ON even at release (touch up).

The new software has three operational modes to handle momentary switches, based on the current value of LW9044. Use a SET WORD of “initial set to configure the desired operation mode. 0: Window pop-up operation is disabled during touch down and up, at the time of touch up the BIT previously set ON will be set OFF even if a pop-up window hides the momentary switch (default initial value). 1: Window pop-up operation is disabled during touch down and up. 2: Window pop-up operation is enabled during touch down and up. Therefore, if the momentary switch is hidden by a pop-up window when touch release, the bit will not be reset. (read/write)

9050 Base Window ID Slave PV can use this word to show the same screen as the Master.

9051 Reserved for Base Window Because PLC control will write back this is reserved.

215

Page 218: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

LW Address

Description Note

9054 Report print-out option 0: Text & Meter & Trend 1: Text & Meter & Trend & Shape but no pattern 2: Text & Meter & Trend & Bitmap 3: Text & Meter & Trend & Bitmap but no pattern 4: All (read/write)

9055 PLC Control word offset There are two options in the PLC Control object using this local word: Change window and report printout. Every word data received from the PLC (or local) PV will add the value of LW9055 as an offset. Before writing back to the PLC, the PV will subtract the value of LW9055. Example: Design a PLC Control object/Change window using D10. If (OW9055) = 10, and D10 = 1 then the PV will change base window to 11. After changing the PV will write 1 to D11. (read/write)

9057 Eventlog Database Item size Management information, the size of every item (read only)

9058 Eventlog Database size Management information, the size of the Database which includes management information. (total_item8item_size+management_info_size) (read/only)

9060~9075 Holds Numeric Input & ASCII Input input data

The 9075 holds the last data entered.

9080~9085 Project name Use ASCII Data to show project name. Occupies 12 bytes. (read only)

9086~9087 Project size in bytes Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

Project size in K bytes Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

9090~9091 Compiler version ID Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

9092 Project compiled date/year Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

216

Page 219: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

LW Address

Description Note

9093 Project compiled date/month Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

9094 Project compiled date/day Use Numeric Data to show it (in Decimal) (read only)

9100~9101 Indirect Addressing – For external PLC only

9100 indirect window number 9101 indirect offset

9130 Language Determines current language (0 thru 3) for multi-language Label Library

217

Page 220: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Reserved Recipe Words

RW Address

Description Note

60000 Real Time Clock second BCD code, valid values: 0 – 59 (read/write allow)

60001 Real Time Clock minute BCD code, valid values: 0 – 59 (read/write allow)

60002 Real Time Clock hour BCD code, valid values: 0 – 23 (read/write allow)

60003 Real Time Clock day BCD code, valid values: 0 – 31 (read/write allow)

60004 Real Time Clock month BCD code, valid values: 0 – 11 (read/write allow)

60005 Real Time Clock year BCD code, valid values: 0 – 9999 (read/write allow)

60006 Real Time Clock week BCD code, valid values: 0 – 6 (read/write allow)

Note about RTC: User can use “Objects to display system time and its value can be written to. But the user must take care to enter only valid values. For example: Seconds cannot be changed to 78(BCD); IF 78(bcd) is entered, the RTC will continue counting 78, 79,80….etc. This will cause unpredictable conditions to occur.

218

Page 221: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.1.3 System Parameter Mapping

System Parameters are stored in the system reserved memory area when recipes are used. The following is a list of these mapping relationships.

PLC Tab

RW System Parameter Note 60040 Serial Port 0: 232

1: 485 60041 Baud Rate 0: 9600

1: 19200 2: 38400 3: 57600 4: 115200

60042 Data bits 0: 7 1: 8

60043 Parity 0: none 1: even 2: odd

60044 Stop bits 0: 1 1: 2

60045 HMI station 60046 PLC station 60047 Multiple HMI 0: no additional

1: master 2: slave

60048 HMI – HMI link speed 0: 38400 1: 115200

60049 PLC time out constant 60050 PLC block pack

219

Page 222: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

General Tab

RW System Parameter Note 60051 Task button: Attribute 0: Disable

1: Enable 60052 Task button: Position 0: Left

1: Right 60053 Task button: background color 60054 Task button: Text 0: Left adjust

1: Center 60055 Alarm bar: Pixel per scroll 8,16,24,32 60056 Alarm bar: Scroll speed unit as of 0.1 sec.

60057 No. of windows 2,3,4,5,6

60060 Startup window no. 10~1999 60061 Backlight saver 0: (Disable)

1~255 minutes (Enable) 60062 Cursor color 60064 Buzzer 0: None

1: Yes 60065 Common window: pop-up window 0: Normal

1: Above any others 60066 Common window: Attribute 0: Below base window

1: Above base window 60067 Extra No. of Event 200~3000 60068 RTC source 0: Local Word

1: Internal RTC 60069 Printer: Driver 0: None

1: EPSON ESC/P2 2: SP Printer 3: HP/PCL Simple Page Mode

60070 Message board window no. 0 (Disable) 10~1999 (Enable)

220

Page 223: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Security Tab

RW System Parameter Note 60071 Security Control 0: None

1: Yes 60072 Password: level 0 Two words 60074 Password: level 1 Two words 60076 Password: level 2 Two words

221

Page 224: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.2 Communication Connections The ports on the back of the PowerView unit are used to connect to a printer, a PLC or some external device (Controller Connectors).

To avoid communications problems, cable lengths should be restricted to less than 500 feet for RS-485/422 devices and 50 feet for RS-232 devices. If a communications problem occurs, the PowerView unit will display the message “PLC no response…” until communication is established. The COM light on the front of the PowerView unit will turn on with each communication.

Shielded cable must be used for long lengths or for electronically noisy environments. Do not run cables next to AC power lines or near sources of electrical noise. Be sure that cable ends have been inserted all of the way into mating connectors and are secure.

8.2.1 Connection to an External Device Pin Designations

This port can NOT be used for programming the PowerView unit or for printing functions.

PLC [RS-232] 9p D-Female

Pin # Symbol Function 1 Not used 2 TxD Transmitted Data 3 RxD Received Data 4 Not used 5 GND Signal Ground 6 Not used 7 CTS Clear to send input 8 RTS Ready to send output 9 Not used

222

Page 225: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.2.2 Connections to a Personal Computer

This is the programming port (PC Connector) and the RS-232/422 communication port for connecting to a controller. This port is activated automatically by the PC during on-line simulation, download and upload activities. The Programming Port cannot simulate, download or upload to the PowerView unit while it is on-line with the controller. The PowerView unit must be put in “RDS mode via the ViewManager interface first.

PC [RS-232] & PLC [RS-485] 9p D-Male

Pin # Symbol Function 1 Rx- RS485 Receive 2 Rx+ RS485 Receive 3 Tx- RS485 Transmit 4 Tx+ RS485 Transmit 5 GND Signal Ground 6 Not used 7 TxD RS-232 Transmit 8 RxD RS-232 Receive 9 Not used

223

Page 226: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

CBL-PV1 Download Cable Configuration (available from Nematron)

8.2.3 Connections to a Printer

The printer port on the back of the PowerView unit is compatible with most printers that have parallel connectors, and most are compatible with the EPSON ESC/P2 printer driver.

The printer cable should not exceed 5 m in length.

Printer Port, 25p D-Female only on PV-1040 & PV-770 models

Pin # Symbol Function 1 STB Output 2 DATA0 Output 3 DATA1 Output 4 DATA2 Output 5 DATA3 Output 6 DATA4 Output 7 DATA5 Output 8 DATA6 Output

224

Page 227: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

9 DATA7 Output 11 BUSY Input

12-15 ERROR Input 16 INIT Output

17-25 GND Signal Ground

225

Page 228: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.3 HMI-to-HMI Connections for Masters/Slaves PowerView HMIs support a Master – Slave communications feature. The PowerView unit that is connected directly to the PLC is configured as the Master (under Edit>System Parameters, PLC tab - Multiple HMI field). All the other HMIs are connected in series to it and are configured as Slaves. In theory there is no limitation to the number of HMIs that can be put on the chain, but response time will gradually degrade when more than three HMIs are linked together.

NOTE: The PowerView HMIs must be configured to be Master or Slave with the ViewBuilder software (under Edit > System Parameters, PLC tab - Multiple HMI field).

Case 1: Slave to Master, connecting PLC[RS-232] directly to PC[RS-232]/PLC[RS-485] combination port.

FROM MASTER HMI PC [RS-232] / PLC [RS-485] (9-pin D-SUB male port) 9-socket D-SUB female cable end

TO FIRST SLAVE HMI PLC [RS-232] (9-socket D-SUB female port) 9-pin D-SUB male cable end

8 RD 2 TD 7 TD 3 RD 5 GND 5 GND

FROM FIRST SLAVE HMI PC[RS-232]/PLC[RS-485] (9-pin D-SUB male port) 9-socket D-SUB female cable end

TO SECOND SLAVE HMI PLC[RS-232] (9-socket D-SUB female port) 9-pin D-SUB male cable end

8 RD 2 TD 7 TD 3 RD 5 GND 5 GND

226

Page 229: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Case 2: Slave to Master, connecting PLC[RS-232] to PC side of split download cable (CBL-PV1) with use of male to male Null Modem cable.

FROM MASTER HMI PC[RS-232]/PLC[RS-485] (9-pin D-SUB male port)

FROM CBL-PV1 END MARKED “PC” (9-socket D-SUB female cable end) 9-pin D-SUB male cable end

TO FIRST SLAVE HMI PLC[RS-232] (9-socket D-SUB female port) 9-pin D-SUB male cable end

3 RD 2 TD 2 TD 3 RD

Connect to CBL-PV1 end marked “HMI “

5 GND 5 GND

227

Page 230: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.4 Ethernet Configuation The PowerView/E Touchscreen HMI now allows Ethernet communication configurations for multiple HMIs. Master/Slave links can be configured from the System Parameter > PLC tab by defining the connection as Ethernet and then entering Local and Server IP addresses.

For details on how to configure an Ethernet communication link, see PLC Tab.

228

Page 231: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5 PLC Connections The following is a list of PLCs currently supported by the PowerView Touchscreen HMI unit. If the PLC device you wish to connect to is not listed, please contact Technical Support for assistance at 1-800-NEMATRON, or email: [email protected]

8.5.1 Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (DF1)

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200 (9600 is the PLC default)

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address

Name Address Range

I1* dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

O0* dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

B3, 10~13 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

N7, 10~15 ddd ddd:000~255

F8 (N8) ddd ddd:000~255

T4 SV, PV ddd ddd:000~255

C5 SV, PV ddd ddd:000~255

Bfn dddddd(dd) ddd: 3,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

Nfnbit dddddd(dd) ddd: 7,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

229

Page 232: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Wiring CPUs with RS-232 Sub-D 9 pin ports. Set RS-232 port protocol to DF1. (Use Nematron CBL-PV4)

PV RS-232 port Sub-D 9 male

AB SLC 503/504 RS-232 port Sub-D 9 Female

2 TD 2 RD

3 RD 3 TD

5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS -----8 CTS

230

Page 233: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.2 Allen-Bradley PLC5 (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200 (9600 is the PLC default)

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address

Name Address Range

I1 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

O0 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

B3 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

B10~13 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

T4SV ddd ddd:000~255

T4PV ddd ddd:000~255

C5SV ddd ddd:000~255

C5PV ddd ddd:000~255

N7 ddd ddd:000~255

N10~15 ddd ddd:000~255

F8 ddd ddd:000~255

Wiring PowerView PLC[232] 9P D-SUB Female

AB CPU CH0 RS-232 25P D-SUB Female

231

Page 234: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2 TX 3 RXD

3 RX 2 TXD

5 GND 5 GND

232

Page 235: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.3 Allen-Bradley SLC DF1

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200 (9600 is the PLC default)

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address

Name Address Range

I1* dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

O0* dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

B3, 10~13 dddbb ddd:000~255 bb: 00~15

N7, 10~15 ddd ddd:000~255

F8 (N8) ddd ddd:000~255

T4 SV, PV ddd ddd:000~255

C5 SV, PV

ddd ddd:000~255

Bfn dddddd(dd) ddd: 3,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

Nfnbit dddddd(dd) ddd: 7,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

Wiring Micrologix CPUs with RS-232 Round 8 pin mini-DIN ports.

CPUs with RS-232 Sub-D 9 pin ports. Set RS-232 port protocol to DF1.

233

Page 236: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

(Use Nematron CBL-PV3) (Use Nematron CBL-PV4)

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

AB Micrologix CPU 8 pin

PV RS-232 port Sub-D 9 male

AB SLC 503/504 RS-232 port Sub-D 9 Female

2 TD 4 RX 2 TD 2 RD

3 RD 7 TX 3 RD 3 TD

5 GND 2 GND 5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS -----8 CTS

234

Page 237: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.4 Allen-Bradley SLC DH485

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

I1* dddbb ddd: 0~255 bb: 00~15

O0* dddbb ddd: 0~255 bb: 00~15

B3, 10~13 dddbb ddd: 0~255 bb: 00~15

N7, 10~15 ddd ddd: 0~255

F8 (N8) ddd ddd: 0~255

T4 SV, PV ddd ddd: 0~255

C5 SV, PV ddd ddd: 0~255

Bfn dddddd(dd) ddd: 3,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

Nfnbit dddddd(dd) ddd: 7,10~254(file) ddd: 0~254(word) (dd): 0~15(bit)

Allen Bradley Input/Output address mapping

Internal memory address

Input I1 nnndd where nnn designates element no. and dd designates bit number. For example, an 8-bit input module in slot 0:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

235

Page 238: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

- - - - - - - - X X X X X X X X I: 0

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I: 1

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I: 2

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I: 3

Input O0 nnndd where nnn designates element no. and dd designates bit number. For example, 8-bit output modules in slots 0 and 1:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - - X X X X X X X X O: 0

- - - - - - - - X X X X X X X X O: 1

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O: 2

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O: 3

Allen Bradley I/O address format:

O: eee.sss/bb

I: eee.ss/bb

Where eee = slot number, sss = word number and bb = bit number

If a controller is configured with 8 point output modules in slot 1 and 2 and an 8 point input module in slot 3, the mapping for Allen Bradley IO address to internal memory address is as follows:

O: 1.0/0 ~ 1.0/7 O: 0 ~ 7

O: 2.0/0 ~ 2.0/7 O: 100 ~ 107

I: 3.0/0 ~ 3.0/7 I: 0 ~ 7

Wiring CPUs with DH485 RJ45 clip style ports

CPUs with RS-232 Sub-D 9 pin ports. Set RS-232 port protocol to DH485.

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 female

AB SLC500 CPUs DH485 Port RJ45 Male

PV RS-232 port Sub-D 9 male

AB SLC504 RS-232 port Sub-D 9 Female

2 RX+ 1 SDB 2 TD 2 RD

1 RX- 2 SDA 3 RD 3 TD

5 GND 7 GND 5 GND 5 GND

236

Page 239: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

237

Page 240: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.5 Bristol Babcock (ControlWave)

The PowerView communicates with the Bristol Babcock Network 3000 and ControlWave controllers using the Modbus RTU communications protocol, where the PowerView is the master in a point-to-point single-master, single-slave format.

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600 (Must match the Modbus port settings)

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

The Modbus port on the Network 3000 Series controllers must be set to RTU mode to communicate properly with the PowerView. The port on the ControlWave controller must be set to Gould Modbus Slave, RTU (Binary).

Device Address

Accessible Controller Memory

Register Memory

The following table lists the controller’s register memory ranges that Nematron PowerViews are able to access.

Please note that your controller’s memory range may be smaller or larger than that supported by Nematron PowerViews. The following register memory is displayable in 132-bit or 64-bit formats on the Nematron PowerView.

Controller Register Access Description

30001 to 39999 Input registers - Read only

40001 to 49999 Holding/output registers - Read/write

238

Page 241: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Discrete Memory

The following table lists the controller’s discrete memory ranges that Nematron PowerViews are able to access.

Please note that your controller’s memory range may be smaller or larger than that supported by Nematron PowerViews. The following discrete memory is displayable in single-bit format on the Nematron PowerView.

Controller Bit Access Description

00001 to 09999 Discrete coils/Output Read/write

10001 to 19999 Discrete inputs Read only

NOTE: As with most Modbus devices, if output bits 00001 through 00015 are not configured in the Bristol-Babcock device, an error message “PLC no response” will occur. These bits need not be accessed by the PowerView program, but they must be configured in the host device as a minimum.

Important Controller Memory Considerations

If your controller’s memory range is smaller than the range supported by Nematron PowerViews, it is possible to configure the Nematron PowerView to monitor a controller memory address that does not exist. Since this can cause unpredictable results, when you configure the Nematron PowerView, please ensure that all selected controller memory addresses are valid for your controller model.

Do not configure the Nematron PowerView to write to any controller memory address which should only be written to by the controller.

Accessing the 1XXXX or 3XXXX Registers

Although the PowerView configuration software allows the programmer to select read/write access for 1XXXX and 3XXXX memory, these controller memory areas are designed to be read-only.

On using Bank 8 or Bank 16 formats

When you use these formats, each controller coil (bit) is individually displayed in terms of 1 and 0, with the lowest addressed coil displayed in the left-most position in the field. Therefore, you use coils 00001-00016, then 00016 is the least significant bit displayed in the right-most position and the 00001

is the most significant bit displayed in the left-most position. The address used must start on a word boundary, which can be determined if the first coil’s address, minus 1 and then divided by 16, leaves no remainder.

Wiring

The Nematron PowerView should be connected to the Modbus port located on the controller.

239

Page 242: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

PowerView ControlWave DE9P DE9S

RxD 3 --------------------------------------------- 3 TxD

TxD 2 --------------------------------------------- 2 RxD

Return 5 ----------------------------------------- 5 Signal Ground

1 DCD

4 DTR

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

WARNING: If your communications cable is not wired exactly as shown in our cable assembly instructions, damage to the Nematron PowerView or loss of communications can result.

240

Page 243: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.6 Delta DVP

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

X ooo ooo: 0 ~ 23417 (Octal)

Y ooo ooo: 0 ~ 23417 (Octal)

M dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

T dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

C dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

TV dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

CV ddd ddd: 0 ~ 127

CV2 ddd ddd: 200 ~ 255 double word counter

D dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

Wiring CPUs with MiniDIN 8 ports

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 male

Delta DVP CPU port

2 TDx 4 RxD

3 RxD 5 TxD

5 GND 8 GND

241

Page 244: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

242

Page 245: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.7 Facon FB

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. Match to PLC setting

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Wiring CPUs with SubD 15 style ports

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 male

Facon FB RS-232 CPU port SubD 15 female

2 TX 1 RX

3 RX 2 TX

5 GND 6 GND

7 CTS ------ 8 RTS 3 RTS ----- 4 CTS

Device Address Name Address Range

X dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

Y dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

M dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

S dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

T dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

C dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

RT dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

243

Page 246: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

RC dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

R dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

D dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

DRT* dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

DRC* dddd dddd: 0~ 9999

244

Page 247: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.8 FUJI NB Series

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

X hhh hhh: 0~1f

Y hhh hhh: 0~1f

M hhh hhh: 0-ff

L hhh hhh: 0-ff

C hhh hhh: 0-1f

M_Spe hhh hhh: 0-1ff

T hhh hhh: 0-1f

CV hhh hhh: 0-1f

TV hhh hhh: 0-1f

D hhh hhh: 0-1f

D_Spe hhh hhh: 0-3f

Wiring PV RS-485 port SubD 9 male

RS-422 CPU port RJ45 8P

1 RX- 4 TX-

245

Page 248: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2 RX+ 3 TX+

3 TX- 6 RX-

4 TX+ 5 RX+

5 GND

8.5.9 GE Fanuc Series 90

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit. Protocol is SNP-X.

Device Address Name Address Range

I dddd dddd: 0 ~ 2048

Q dddd dddd: 0 ~ 2048

M dddd dddd: 0 ~ 4096

AI dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

AQ dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

R dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

246

Page 249: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Wiring CPUs withSubD 15 style ports (Use Nematron CBL-PV5)

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 female

GE90 RS-422 SubD 15 Male

4 TX+ 11 RD(B)

3 TX- 10 RD(A)

2 RX+ 13 SD(B)

1 RX- 12 SD(A)

5 GND 7 SG

6 RTS(A) ---- 15 CTS(A)

14 RTS(B) ----- 8 CTS(B)

247

Page 250: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.10 Hitachi EH-150

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

X Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

Y Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

M Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

T Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

R Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

L Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

TC Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

WX Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

WY Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

WR Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

WL Hhhh Hhhh: 0~ FFFF

Wiring CPUs with 8 pin RS-232

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 male

Hitachi EH-CPU RS232 8 pin

248

Page 251: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

2 TX 3 RD

3 RX 4 SD

5 GND 8 PG

7 CTS 1 RS

8 RTS 2 DR

249

Page 252: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.11 IDEC Micro3

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 255

PLC Setting

None.

Device Address Name Address Range

X ddddo dddd: 0 ~ 2047, O: 0 ~ 7

Y ddddo dddd: 0 ~ 2047, O: 0 ~ 7

M ddddo dddd: 0 ~ 2047, O: 0 ~ 7

RT dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

RC dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

D dddd dddd: 0 ~ 9999

Wiring CPUs with 8 Pin MiniDIN ports

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 female

IDEC Micro3 CPU port

1 RX- 2 B

2 RX+ 1 A

5 GND 7 GND

250

Page 253: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.12 Keyence

ViewBuilder Settings COM port

Used in KV series: KV-10, KV-16, KV-24, KV-40

RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

None.

Device Address Name Address Range

End_Command ddd ddd: 0 (See note below)

ddd ddd: 0 ~ 1999

TM ddd ddd: 0 ~ 99

Relay ddd ddd: 0 ~ 19999

Timer_Contact ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

Timer_Current ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

Timer_Preset ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

Counter_Contact ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

Counter_Current ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

Counter_Preset ddd ddd: 0 ~ 999

DM

The End_Command is only used for communication begin and end. Set End_Command 0 on: Starts communications between the KV and the PowerView. Set End_Command 0 off: Ends communications between the KV and the PowerView.

Wiring

251

Page 254: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 female

KV RJ11 CPU port

2 TX 5 RXD

3 RX 3 TXD

5 GND 4 GND

252

Page 255: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.13 Koyo Direct

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1 – DL240 or 1 –DL440

PLC Setting

Communication is K-sequence. Setting DL440 Station No. = 1

Device Address Name Address Range

X (I) ooo 0 ~ 477

Y (Q) ooo 0 ~ 477

C (M) ooo 0 ~ 377

T ooo 0 ~ 177

CT © ooo 0 ~ 177

V (R) oooo 0 ~ 7777

Wiring Koyo DL205 CPU RJ12 clip style ports. (Use Nematron CBL-PV10)

Koyo DL405 CPU SubD 15 style ports. (Use Nematron CBL-PV8)

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – Male

Koyo DL205 CPU Port 1 or Port 2 RJ12 Male

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 - Male

Koyo DL405 CPU RS-232 Port 1 SubD 15 - Male

2 TX 3 RXD 2 TX 3 RXD

3 RX 4 TXD 3 RX 2 TXD

253

Page 256: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

5 GND 1 GND 5 GND 13 GND

7 RTS ---- 8 CTS

254

Page 257: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Koyo DL405 CPU with SubD 25 style ports

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – female

Koyo DL440 CPU Port 2 SubD 15 - Male

4 TX+ 9 RX+

3 TX- 10 RX-

2 RX+ 14 TX+

1 RX- 16 TX-

11 RTS+ ---19 CTS+

23 RTS- ----18 CTS-

5 GND 7 GND

255

Page 258: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.14 LG Glofa GM Cnet

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. Must match PLC setting

PLC Setting

Set Operating Mode Switch to 3 (dedicated communication). Refer to LG Frame Editor manual.

Device Address Name Address Range

MX ddddd ddddd: 0 ~ 32767

MW ddddd ddddd: 0 ~ 32767

Wiring LG GLOFA GM CPUs with Cnet RS-232 SubD 9 pin ports.

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 male

GLOFA G4L-CUEA RS-232C SubD 9 male

2 TX 2 RX

3 RX 3 TX

5 GND 5 GND

1 CD --- 7 RTS ----8 CTS

4 DTR ---- 6 DSR

256

Page 259: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.15 LG Master K Cnet

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. Must match PLC setting

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

P dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

K dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

M dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

L dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

F dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

TV ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

CV ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

D dddd dddd: 9999

Wiring LG GLOFA GM CPUs with Cnet RS-232 SubD 9 pin ports.

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 male

Master K200S Cnet I/F SubD 9 male

2 TX 4 RXD

3 RX 7 TXD

257

Page 260: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

5 GND 5 GND

258

Page 261: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.16 Matsushita FP1

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

X dddh ddd: 0~255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

Y dddh ddd: 0~255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

R dddh ddd: 0~255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

T ddd ddd: 0~255

C ddd ddd: 0~255

SV ddd ddd: 0~255

EV ddd ddd: 0~255

DT dddd dddd: 0~4095

Wiring Matsushita FP1 CPU 8 Pin MiniDIN ports

Matsushita FP1 CPU SubD 9 style RS-232 ports

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – female

Matsushita FP1 CPU port 8 pin MiniDIN male

PV RS-232 port Sub-D 9 male

Matsushita FP1 RS-232 port SubD 9 Male

259

Page 262: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

1 RX- 2 TxA 2 TX 3 RD

2 RX+ 5 TxB 3 RX 2 SD

3 TX- 3 RxA 5 GND 7 GND

4 TX+ 6 RxB 5 CS ----4 RS

5 GND 1 GND 8 CD ----9ER (not for FP2)

260

Page 263: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.17 Mitsubishi AJ71C24

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting Station No. = Switches 00

Mode Setting Switch Protocol 1

Computer Link/multi-drop link

Computer Link

Parity Bit setting Set

Sum checking Set

Communication parameters must be the same as those of the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

X hhh hhh: 0 ~7FF (hexadecimal)

Y hhh hhh: 0 ~7FF (hexadecimal)

M dddd ddd: 0~9999

TV ddd ddd: 0~255

CV ddd ddd: 0~255

D dddd ddd: 0~9999

Wiring PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – Male

AJ71C24 25-pin

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – female

RS-422 port

261

Page 264: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

2 TXD 3 RXD 4 TX+ RDA

3 RXD 2 TXD 3 TX- RDB

5 GND 7 GND 2 RX+ SDA

4 RTS--5 CTS 1 RX- SDB

6 DSR--8 CD--20 DTR 5 GND GND

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – Male

AISJ71C24 9-pin

2 TXD 2 RXD

3 RXD 3 TXD

5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS – 8 CTS

1 CD -- 4 DTR – 6 DSR

8.5.18 Mitsubishi AnS

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

None. Compatible with Mitsubishi A2A, A2US, A3N/A1SH, A1S models.

Device Address Name Address Range

X hhh hhh: 0 ~ 7FF (hexadecimal)

Y hhh hhh: 0 ~ 7FF (hexadecimal)

M dddd dddd: 0~9999

262

Page 265: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

TV ddd ddd: 0~255

CV ddd ddd: 0~255

D dddd dddd: 0~9999

Wiring

Use Nematron part number CBL-PV2 to connect the PowerView RS-232 port with Mitsubishi A Series CPU port.

263

Page 266: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.19 Mitsubishi FX

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

None. Compatible with:

Mitsubishi FXon (Use Fxon/FX2 driver)

Mitsubishi FX2 (Use Fxon/FX2 driver)

Mitsubishi FX2n (Use FX2n driver)

Device Address Name Address Range

X ooo ooo: 0 ~ 177 (Octal)

Y ooo ooo: 0 ~ 177 (Octal)

M dddd dddd: 0~1023

T ddd ddd: 0~255

ddd ddd: 0~255

TV ddd ddd: 0~255

CV ddd ddd: 0~199

CV2 ddd ddd: 200 ~ 255 double word counter

D dddd dddd: 0~9999*

C

0 ~ 999 for Fxon and FX2

Wiring

264

Page 267: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

FX series CPUs with SubD 25 style ports FX Series CPUs with MiniDIN 8 ports.

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – female

FX2 CPU port PV RS-485 port Sub-D 9 female

FX2N/Fxo CPU port MiniDIN 8 Male

4 TX+ 2 RXD+ 4 TX+ 2 RXD+

3 TX- 15RXD- 3 TX- 1 RXD-

2 RX+ 3 RXD+ 2 RX+ 7 TXD+

1 RX- 16 TXD- 1 RX- 4 TXD-

5 GND 7 GND----4 DSR+ 5 GND 3 GND

13 +5V ---- 17 DSR-

SubD 25 Male

8.5.20 Mitsubishi J2-S100

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485 4W

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication Mode: 9600, E, 8, 1 (default)

Device Address Bit/Word Name Format Range

B I ddd ddd:0~31

B EI ddd ddd:0~31

B C ddd ddd:0~31

B O ddd ddd:0~31

B EO ddd ddd:0~31

DW D hhh hhh:1~2

DW R hhh hhh:1~2

265

Page 268: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Wiring

RS-485 4W:

PV RS-485 9P D-SUB Male

J2-S100 CPU port RS-422

1 RX- 2 RX+ 3 TX- 4 TX+

19 SDN 9 SDP 15 RDN 5 RDP

5 GND

11 GND

1 GND

266

Page 269: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

RS-232: PV RS-232 9P D-SUB Female

J2-S100 CPU port RS-232

2 TX 2 RXD

3 RX 12 TXD

5 GND

11 GND

1 GND

267

Page 270: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.21 Mitsubishi FX2n D (bit)

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-422

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1 (refer to PLC)

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

Communication Mode: 9600, E, 7, 1 (default)

Device Address Bit/Word Name Format Range

B X ooo 0 ~ 377

B Y ooo 0 ~ 377

B M dddd 0 - 7999

B SM dddd 8000 - 9999

B T ddd 0 - 255

B C ddd 0 - 255

B D(bit) ddd(dd) 0 - 7999 (dd) = 0 - 15

W TV ddd 0 - 255

W W W W

CV CV2 D SD

ddd ddd dddd dddd

0 – 199 200 – 255 0 – 7999 8000 - 9999

Wiring PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – Female

FX2 CPU port 8P mini DIN

268

Page 271: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

1 RX- 2 RX+ 3 TX- 4 TX+

4 TX- 7 TX+ 1 RX- 2 RX+

5 GND 3 GND

269

Page 272: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.22 Modicon Modbus

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No.

PLC Station No.

0

As per PLC setting

PLC Setting

PLC ID number must match setting in PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

1x (Input) ddddd ddddd: 1~32767

0x (Coil) ddddd ddddd: 1~32767

3x (Input Reg.) ddddd ddddd: 1~32767

4x (Hold Reg.) ddddd ddddd: 1~32767

Also compatible with:

SIXNET, SIXTRAK Gateways and VersaTRAK RTUs

Control Microsystems, SCADAPack Series

Entertron Industries, Programmable controllers with Modbus option

Saftronics, VG5 Modbus Drive with GV5 Modbus

Wiring Modbus SubD 9 ports Modbus Micro RJ45 ports.

(Use Nematron CBL-PV11)

PV RS-232 port All Modicon CPUs PV RS-232 port Modicon Micro CPUs

270

Page 273: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

SubD 9 – male Modbus Port SubD 9 Male

Sub-D 9 male Modbus port RJ45 Male

2 TX 2 RXD 2 TX 4 RXD

3 RXD 3 RX 3 TXD

5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS ---- 8 CTS 7 RTS ---- 8 CTS 7 RTS --- 8 CTS 6 RTS --- 7 CTS

3 RX

271

Page 274: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.23 Modbus RTU

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. As per PLC setting

Parameter 1: 0 or 1

When RS-232 is selected, Parameter 1 has the following function:

0: RS-485 (2 wire) 1: RS-422 (4 wire)

Parameter 2: 0 ~ 1000

Will not work for simulation mode.

PowerView unit will delay (value + 1) milliseconds before sending command to PLC. Some slow PLCs require this parameter. Some slow PLCs require this parameter if response is intermittent, or if the “No Response” message occurs.

PLC Setting

PLC station number must match setting in PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

1x (Input) ddd ddd: 1~9999

0x (Coil) ddd ddd: 1~9999

3x (Input Reg.) ddd ddd: 1~9999

4x (Hold Reg.) ddd ddd: 1~9999

5x (Hold Reg.) ddd ddd: 1~9999

272

Page 275: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Address type 5x are mapping to Hold Reg. The communication protocol of 5x is almost the same as 4x, except 5x is making a double word swap.

273

Page 276: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

For example, if 4x have the following information:

Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 …

Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6

Data 0x40003 0x60005 0x20001

Then for 5x, it becomes:

Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 …

Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6

0x10002 0x30004 Data 0x50006

Wiring Modbus RTU (RS-232) Pointe Controller (RS-232)

(Use Nematron CBL-PV10)

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 - female SubD 9 - male

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 - female

PeC RS-232 port RJ-12

2 TX 2 RXD 2 TX 3 RX

3 RX 3 TXD 3 RX 4 TX

5 GND 5 GND 5 GND 1 GND

Modbus RS-232 port

Modbus RTU (RS-422 4WIRE) Modbus RTU (RS-485 2WIRE)

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 female

Modbus RS-422 port SubD 9 female

Modbus RS-485 port

RX- 1 RX- B/D-

2 RX+ RX+ 2 RX+ A/D+

TX- 5 GND GND

4 TX+ TX+

GND

PV RS-485 port

1 RX-

3 TX-

5 GND

274

Page 277: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.24 Modbus RTU Extend

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 / RS-485(4W) / RS-485(2W) – refer to

PLC

9600

8

Even

1

0 (no use)

PLC Station No. 1 (refer to PLC)

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

HMI Station No.

Parameter 2: 0 ~ 1000

Will not work for simulation mode.

The PowerView unit will delay (value + 1) milliseconds before sending a command to the PLC. Some slow PLCs require this parameter if response is intermittent, or if the “No Response” message occurs.

Device Address Bit/Word Name Format Range

B 1x ddd 1 - 9999

B 0x ddd 1 - 9999

B 4x_bit dddd(dd) 100 – 9999(0 – 15)

W 3x ddd 1 - 9999

W W

4x 5x

ddd ddd

1 - 9999 1 - 9998

Address type 5x map to Hold Reg. The communication protocol of 5x is almost the same as 4x, except 5x makes a double word swap.

For example, if 4x has the following information:

Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 …

Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6

Data 0x20001 0x40003 0x60005

275

Page 278: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Then for 5x, it becomes:

Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 …

Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6

Data 0x10002 0x30004 0x50006

NOTE: On the System Parameters… > Editor Tab, the Address Mode field must be set to Extended for the Extended Addressing to work correctly.

Wiring RS-232

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 female

Modbus RTU Slave RS-232 port

2 TX RD

3 RX SD

5 GND GND

RS485 4W (RS422) RS-485 2W

PV RS-485 port Modbus RTU Slave RS-422 port

PV RS-485 port Modbus RTU Slave

276

Page 279: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

SubD 9 male SubD 9 male RS-485 port

1 RX- TX- 1 RX- RX-

2 RX+ TX+ 2 RX+ RX+

3 TX- RX- 5 GND GND

4 TX+ RX+

5 GND GND

277

Page 280: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.25 Omron Host Link

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 0

PLC Setting

HostLink Protocol Communication parameters must be the same as those in the PowerView unit.

Device Address Name Address Range

IR dddbb ddd: 0 ~ 255 bb: 0 ~ 15

HR dddbb ddd: 0 ~ 255 bb: 0 ~ 15

AR dddbb ddd: 0 ~ 255 bb: 0 ~ 15

LR dddbb ddd: 0 ~ 255 bb: 0 ~ 15

TC(PV) ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

DM dddd dddd: 0 ~ 4095

Wiring OMRON CQM Series CPUs SubD 9 style ports

Modbus Micro RJ45 ports.

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

OMRON QM/LK201 RS-232 port SubD 9 male

PV RS-485 port Sub-D 9 female

RS-422 port

2 TX 3 RD 4 TX+ 1 RDB

3 RX 2 SD 3 TX- 6 RDA

OMRON LK202

278

Page 281: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

5 GND 9 SG 2 RX+ 5 SDB

7 RTS ---- 8 CTS 1 RX- 9 SDA

5 GND 3 SG

279

Page 282: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.26 Omron CQM1H-CPU61

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 2

0

PLC Station No. 0

HMI Station No.

PLC Setting

None.

Device Address Bit/Word Device Type Format Range

B IR ddd(dd) 0 – 4095 (15)

B HR ddd(dd) 0 – 99 (15)

B AR ddd(dd) 0 – 27 (15)

B LR ddd(dd) 0 – 68 (15)

W TC(PV) ddd 0 - 511

W W

DM EM0

ddd ddd

0 – 6655 0 - 6143

Wiring PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

OMRON CQM1H-CPU61 RS-232 port SubD 9 male

2 TX 3 RD

3 RX 2 SD

5 GND 9 SG

280

Page 283: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4 RS – 5 CS

281

Page 284: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.27 Samsung SPC-10

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No.

PLC Station No. 255

192

PLC Setting

None.

Device Address Name Address Range

R ddd(dd) ddd: 0 ~ 9999 (dd): 0 ~ 15

K ddd(dd) ddd: 0 ~ 9999 (dd): 0 ~ 15

M ddd(dd) ddd: 0 ~ 9999 (dd): 0 ~ 15

F ddd(dd) ddd: 0 ~ 9999 (dd): 0 ~ 15

W ddd ddd: 0 ~ 9999

Wiring PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – Male

Samsung SPC-10 CPU port 8 Pin mini DIN

1 RX- 6 TR-

2 RX+ 7 TR+

5 GND 5 GND

282

Page 285: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.28 Sharp JW Series

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 7

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1~ -63

PLC Setting

PLC default is 1.

Device Address Name Address Range

R ooo(o) ooo: 0 ~ 1577(o)

TC ooo ooo: 0 ~ 776

DM ooo ooo: 0 ~ 3776

TC, DM address must be an even number.

Device PLC Device Example of Mapping

R0-R15777 (A0000-A1577) R15777 is mapping to (A1577) bit 7

TC0-TC776 (B000-B0777) TC2 mapping to (B0002-B0003)

DM000-DM776 (09000-09777) D10 mapping to (09010-09011)

DM1000-DM1776 (19000-19777) D1010 mapping to (19010-19011)

DM2000-DM2776 (29000-29777) D2010 mapping to (29010-29011)

DM3000-DM3776 (39000-39777) D3010 mapping to (39010-39011)

Wiring PV RS-485 port Sharp JW

283

Page 286: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

SubD 9 female Communication Port

L2

2 RX+ L1

1 RX-

284

Page 287: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.29 Siemens S7-200

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 2

PLC Setting

S7 200 Station No. = 02

Device Address Name Address Range

I ddo dd: 0 ~ 99 o: 0 ~ 7

Q ddo dd: 0 ~ 99 o: 0 ~ 7

M dddo ddd: 0 ~ 511 o: 0 ~ 7

VW dddd dddd: 0,2,4,….must be even

Wiring PV RS-485 port SubD 9 - Female

S7-200 CPU port SubD 9 - Male

2 RX+ 3 D+

1 RX- 8 D-

5 GND 5 GND

285

Page 288: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.30 Siemens S7-300 (w/HMI or PC Adaptor)

ViewBuilder Settings HMI Adaptor PC Adaptor

COM port RS-232 RS-232

Baud Rate 9600 19200

Data Bits 8 8

Parity Odd Odd

Stop Bits 1 1

HMI Station No. 0 0

2 2 PLC Station No.

PLC Setting

S300 Station number must be 02 and create DB10.

Device Address Name Address Range

I ddo dd: 0 ~ 99 o: 0 ~ 7

Q ddo dd: 0 ~ 99 o: 0 ~ 7

M dddo ddd: 0 ~ 511 o: 0 ~ 7

VB10 dddd dddd: 0,2,4,….must be even

Wiring

Adaptor cable to go from the HMI to HMI Adaptor or PC Adaptor cable. DO NOT PLUG THIS CABLE DIRECTLY INTO THE PLC!!!

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

S7-300 HMI or PC Adaptor cable end

SubD 9 female

2 TX 2 RS

3 RX 3 TD

RS-232 port

286

Page 289: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS -----8 CTS

287

Page 290: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.31 Simatic TI505

ViewBuilder Settings

SIMATIC TI505 Series PLCs: TI520, TI525, TI530, TI535, TI545, TI555, TI560, TI565, TI575. Using the NITP protocol in a point-to-point single master, single slave format.

COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 7

Parity Odd

1

0

0

Stop Bits

HMI Station No.

PLC Station No.

PLC Setting

NITP protocol.

Device Address Name Address Range

CR ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

X ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

Y ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

V ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

STW ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

TCP ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

TCC ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

WX ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

WY ddddd ddddd: 1~ 65535

Wiring PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – Female

SIMATIC TI505 25 Pin SubD

2 TX 3 RXD

288

Page 291: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

3 RX 2 TXD

5 GND 7 GND

4 RTS -----5 CTS

6 DSR -----8 DCD

8 DCD ----20 DTR

289

Page 292: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – Female

SIMATIC TI505 9 Pin SubD

2 TX 2 RXD

3 RX 3 TXD

5 GND 5 GND

7 RTS -----8 CTS

1 DCD ---- 4 DTR

4 DTR ---- 6 DSR

PV RS-232 port SIMATIC TI505 9 Pin SubD

1 RX- 7 DO(-)

2 RX+ 1 DO(+)

3 TX- 8 DI(-)

4 TX+ 5 DI(+)

5 GND 6 GND

SubD 9 – Male

290

Page 293: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.5.32 Telemecanique TSX37/07

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits

HMI Station No. 1 to 5

PLC Station No. 0

1

PLC Setting

None (Unitelway Protocol).

Device Address Name Address Range

M ddddd ddddd: 0 ~ 32767

S ddddd ddddd: 0 ~ 32767

MW.B ddddbb dddd: 0 ~ 9999 bb: 00~15

MW ddddd ddddd: 0 ~ 32767

Wiring PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – female

TSX07 and 37 CPUs 8 pin MiniDIN ports

1 RX- 2 B

2 RX+ 1 A

3 TX- bridged to 1 RX-

4 TX+ bridged to 2 RX+

5 GND 7 GND

291

Page 294: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.33 Toshiba T Series

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity Odd

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. As per PLC setting

PLC Setting

Set PLC Node ID.

Device Address Name Range

X dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F

Y dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F

R dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F

S dddh ddd: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F

T ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

C ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

D dddd dddd: 0 ~ 4095

SW ddd ddd: 0 ~ 255

XW ddd ddd: 0 ~ 63

ddd ddd: 0 ~ 63

RW ddd ddd: 0 ~ 127

Address

YW

Wiring Toshiba T1 CPUs 8 pin MiniDIN ports

Toshiba T Series CPUs SubD 15 style Link ports

PV RS-232 port Toshiba T1 CPU port PV RS-485 port Toshiba T2 Linkport

292

Page 295: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

SubD 9 – male 8 pin MiniDIN male Sub-D 9 female SubD 15 Male

2 TX 8 RxD 2 RX+ 3 TxA

3 RX 6 TxD 1 RX- 11 TxB

5 GND 5 GND 4 TX+ 2 RxA

4 RTS --- 7 CTS 3 TX- 10 RxB

5 RTSA --- 4 CTSA

13 RTSB --- 12 CTSB

5 GND 7 SG

293

Page 296: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.5.34 VIGOR

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 7

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

HMI Station No. 0

PLC Station No. 1

PLC Setting

None.

Device Address Name Address

X ooo 0 ~ 177

Y ooo 0 ~ 177

M ddddd 0 ~ 4095

S ddd 0 ~ 999

T ddd 0 ~ 255

C ddd

ddd 0 ~ 255

ddd 0 ~ 255

D dddd 0 ~ 4095

DL dddd 0 ~ 4095

Range

0 ~ 255

TV

CV

Wiring

RS-485 4wire:

PV RS-485 port SubD 9 – Male

VIGOR M series 6pin terminal

1 RX- TX-

2 RX+ TX+

3 TX- RX-

294

Page 297: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

4 TX+ RX+

5 GND SG

24V

PV RS-232 port VIGOR M series COM port

2 TX 2 RXD

3 RX 3 TXD

5 GND 5 GND

SubD 9 – Female

8.5.35 Yokogawa PLC Series

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232

Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1 (refer to PLC)

HMI Station No.

PLC Station No.

PLC Setting Baud Rate 19200

Data Bits 8

Parity Even

Stop Bits 1

Device Address Bit/Word Device Type Format

B X ooo 0~177

B Y ooo 0~177

B dddd 0~4095

Range

M

295

Page 298: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

B S ddd 0~999

B T ddd 0~255

B C ddd 0~255

W TV ddd 0~255

W CV ddd 0~255

W D dddd 0~4095

W DL dddd 0~4095

Wiring

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

CPU port cable KM11 RS232

2 TX 3 RD

3 RX 2 SD

5 GND 5 GND

PV RS-232 port SubD 9 – male

LC11 Computer Link module RS232 port

2 TX 2 SD

3 RX 3 RD

5 GND 5 GND 7 GND 8 GND

8.5.36 Memory Map Protocol

Memory Map protocol is similar to IBM 3764R communication protocol. The PowerView reserves 512 words of data memory for use with this protocol. The Host must update the values in these words. The PowerView uses the words to display data and controls parts status on its screen. When touch actions are taken, data is sent to the Host and the Host must then update the memory in the PowerView. The Host is always responsible for updating the PowerView memory.

ViewBuilder Settings COM port RS-232 or RS-485

Baud Rate As per Host setting

Data Bits As per Host setting

Parity As per Host setting

Stop Bits As per Host setting

HMI Station No. 0

296

Page 299: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

PLC Station No. 0

Select one of the following from the Driver list in the System Parameters settings:

MemoryMap_Master: The PowerView commands take precedence whenever there is a “collision on the communication lines. The Host must wait for all clear and then send commands.

MemoryMap_Slave: The Host commands take precedence whenever there is a “collision on the communication lines. The PowerView must wait for all clear and then send commands.

C. Memory Map Designations

Device Name Address Range

MB (bits) dddh nnn: 0 ~ 255 h: 0 ~ F (hexadecimal)

MW (words) dddd ddd: 0000 ~ 511

ML (long words) dddd ddd: 0000, 0002, 0004…..0510

Only 512 words are allocated for use. The first 255 words can also be used as bit addresses. Word 0 contains bits 0000 through 000F, word 1 contains bits 0010 through 001F, etc. Beware of using words that already have some of their bits designated for use in the lower area. The same applies for long (double) words. Long words use up two words of memory and must be designated with even numbered addresses.

297

Page 300: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

D. Method of Operation

Communications are controlled by software flow control methods. All communications begin with an STX command being sent. The receiving device then responds with ACK if ready to accept information or NAK if busy. When communications are ended, an ACK or NAK confirms if the data was received properly.

For example:

Good Communication Sequence

Delayed Communication Sequence

Bad Communication Sequence

Host: STX PV (slave) ACK Host: String of data PV ACK

Host: STX PV (master) NAK Host: waits a while then sends STX PV (master) ACK Host: String of data PV ACK

Host: STX PV (slave) ACK Host: String of data PV NAK Host: repeats sequence hoping for better results

E. Word Write Operation

STX

ACK

01 (Hexadecimal)

Word Address (Low byte)

Word Address (High byte)

Number of bytes

Data bytes : : :

DLE

ETX

Basic Checksum (BCC)

ACK

298

Page 301: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

F. Bit Write Operation

STX

ACK

02 (Hexadecimal)

Bit Address (Low byte)

Bit Address (High byte)

Number of bytes

Data 00 or 01

DLE

ETX

Basic Checksum (BCC)

ACK

If DLE (10 hex) is in the data being sent, it must be sent twice to avoid premature end of transmission.

NOTE: BCC is the XOR of all transmitted data in a frame including the DLE and ETX commands.

8.5.37 Hexadecimal Codes

Code Hex

STX 02

ETX 03

ACK 06

DLE 10

NAK 15

299

Page 302: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

300

Page 303: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.6 ASCII Protocol Specification

8.6.1 Command List

The following commands are used for communication between the ASCII host and the PowerView.

Mnemonic Command Name

Description

RD Batch Read Reads specified data in a continuous block

WD Batch Write Writes specified data in a continuous block

RR Random Read Reads data from multiple, non-consecutive devices

RW Random Write Writes data to multiple, non-consecutive devices

RC Read Coil Reads the specified coils in a continuous block

WC Write Coil Writes the specified coils in a continuous block

8.6.2 Optional Parameters

Parameters 1 – 4 are used as follows:

Parameter 1: Reserved for the RS485/RS422 Wiring Mode. 0=422, 1=485

Parameter 2: Turn Around Delay. This sets the time delay (in milliseconds) between when the PowerView receives a command, and when a response is issued. Also, see Parameter 4.

Parameter 3: Sets the Protocol Mode .

0: Robust This protocol uses the non-printable characters STX (02H) and ETX (03H), ACK (06H), and NAK (15H); and includes a 2-byte checksum.

1: Simple Some Host devices (such as some Motion Controllers) are not capable of generating non-printable characters, or calculating the checksum. In this mode, the data packets are formed as defined below, but do not include the STX, ACK, ETX, NAK, or checksum. Add CR to end of packet. PowerView adds CR to reply (0x0D)

Parameter 4: Sets whether or not the PowerView responds to Write commands..

0: Responses On

1: Responses Off

NOTE: If set to 1, the Turn Around Delay setting (Parameter 2) has no affect.

301

Page 304: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

8.6.3 Network Support

Wiring

The PowerView ASCII protocol shall support network wiring using RS485 2-wire or 4-wire, based on the setting of Parameter 1.

Addressing

The protocol supports each PowerView having a unique Station ID. Valid Station ID’s may be defined from 1 to 255.

Broadcast Messages

A command with a Station ID of 0 shall be considered a Broadcast Message. Broadcast Messages will be processed by the PowerView, regardless of the PowerView’s Station Address. The PowerView shall not issue a reply message when a Broadcast Message is received, regardless of the setting of Parameter 4.

302

Page 305: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.6.4 Command Usage

RD (Batch Read)

Request

This command reads up to 99 consecutive 16-bit items from the HMI’s ‘D’ memory area. The command is always 14 bytes long.

Byte 1 Bytes 2,3 Bytes 4, 5 Bytes 6-9 Bytes 10, 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13, 14

1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes

STX Station RD Addr. No. of Items ETX Checksum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to read (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 6-9: This is the starting address to read from. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 10, 11: This is the number of addresses to read, up to 99. Must be 2 bytes long.

Byte 12: Always ETX (0x03)

Bytes 13, 14: The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12.

Example: Read three words starting from address D100, from the HMI at station 10 (0AH). This will read addresses D100 – D102.

Byte 1 Bytes 2, 3 Bytes 4, 5 Bytes 6-9 Bytes 10, 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13, 14

STX 0A RD 0100 03 ETX 2E

02 30,41 52,44 30,31,30,30 30,33 03 32,45

The checksum (bytes 13 and 14) is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 – 12.

30 + 41+ 52 + 44 + 30 + 31 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 33 + 03 = 22E.

The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2E.

303

Page 306: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Reply

The reply length is: L = (N * 4 ) + 8

Where N = the number of requested devices.

If the command is successful, the reply length will be at least 12 bytes, but could be as long as 404 bytes. It consists of the STX, followed by four bytes for each requested device, then the ETX and Checksum.

Byte 1

Bytes 2, 3

Bytes 4,5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10-13

Bytes 14-17

Bytes 18 - (L-7)

Bytes (L-6) - (L-

3)

STX Station CMD Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 – Data (N-1)

Data N

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

ETX Checksum

The above example returns the following, assuming the HMI contains the following data:

Address Data

100 75 (4BH)

101 8047 (1F6FH)

102 16,321 (3FC1H)

The following is the packet sent from the HMI

STX ‘0’ ‘A’ ‘R’ ‘D’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘4’ ‘B’ ‘1’ ‘F’ ‘6’ ‘F’ ‘3’ ‘F’ ‘C’ ‘1’

02H 30H 41H 52H 44H 30H 30H 34H 42H 31H 46H 36H 46H 33H 46H 43H 31H

ETX ‘C’ ‘1’

02H 43H 31H

The values in each requested device are returned in Hex. The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 – (L-2).

In the event of an error, the reply is

304

Page 307: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘R’, ‘D’ Err Code

305

Page 308: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

WD (Batch Write)

Request

This command writes up to 99 consecutive 16-bit items to the HMI’s D memory area. The length of the command is:

L = (N * 4) + 14

Where N = the number of requested devices.

The command will be at least 18 bytes long, but can be up to 410 bytes long.

Byte 1

Bytes 2, 3

Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10, 11

Bytes 12-15

Bytes 16-19

Bytes 20 - (L-7)

Bytes (L-6) - (L-3)

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

STX Station WD Addr. No. of Items

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 – Data (N-1)

Data N ETX Check-sum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to write (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 4-7: This is the starting address to write to. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 8, 9: This the number of addresses to write. Must be 2 bytes long.

Bytes 10 – (L-3): The data to write. Up to 99 items, four Hex digits each.

Byte (L-2): Always ETX (0x03).

Bytes L-1, L: Checksum

Example: Write three words starting from address D201, to the HMI at station 17 (11H). This will write to addresses D201, D202, and D203.

D201 = 101 (0x65)

D202 = 575 (0x23F)

D203 = 1049 (0x419)

Byte 1

Bytes 2, 3

Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9 Bytes 10,11

Bytes 12-15 Bytes 16-19 Bytes 20-23 Byte 24

Bytes 25,26

STX 11 WD 0201 03 0065 023F 0419 ETX 9A

02 31,31 57,44 30,32,30,31 30,33 30,30,36,35 30,32,33,46 30,34,31,39 03 39,41

306

Page 309: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

The checksum (bytes 25 and 26) is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 – 24.

31+ 31 + 57 + 44 + 30 + 32 + 30 + 31 + 30 + 33 + 30 + 30 + 36 + 35 + 30 + 32 + 33+ 46 + 30 + 34+ 31+ 39 + 03 = 49A.

The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 9A.

Reply

If the command is successful, the reply is

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5

ACK Station ‘W’, ‘D’

In the event of an error, the reply is

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘W’, ‘D’ Err Code

307

Page 310: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

RR (Random Read)

Request

This command reads up to 99 independently-addressed 16-bit items from the HMI’s D memory area. The length of the command is :

L = (N * 4) + 8

Where N = the number of requested devices.

The command will be at least 12 bytes long, but can be up to 402 bytes long.

Byte 1

Bytes 2, 3

Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10-13

Bytes 14 - (L-7)

Bytes (L-6) - (L-3)

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

STX Station RR Addr 1 Addr 2

Addr 3 – Addr (N-1)

Addr N ETX Check-sum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to read (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 6-9: This is the first address from which to retrieve data. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 10-13: This is the second address from which to retrieve data. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 14 – (L-7): The remaining addresses from which to retrieve data. Each address must be 4 bytes long.

Byte (L-2): Always ETX (0x03).

Bytes L-1, L: Checksum, calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 – (L-2).

Reply

If successful, the reply length is

L = (N * 4) + 10

Where N = the number of requested devices.

If successful, the reply length will be at least 12 bytes, but can be up to 406 bytes. It consists of the STX, followed by four bytes for each requested device, then the ETX and Checksum.

Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes (L-6) - (L-

308

Page 311: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

1 2,3 4,5 6-9 10-13 14-17 15 - (L-7) 3)

STX Station Cmd Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 – Data (N-1)

Data N

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

ETX Checksum

The values in each requested device are returned in Hex. The checksum is calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 – (L-2)..

In the event of an error, the reply is

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘R’, ‘R’ Err Code

309

Page 312: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

RW (Random Write)

Request

This command writes up to 99 independently-addressed 16-bit items to the HMI’s D memory area. The length of the command is

L = (N * 8) + 8

Where N = the number of requested devices.

The command will be at least 16 bytes long, but can be up to 800 bytes long.

Byte 1

Bytes 2,3

Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10-13

Bytes 14-17

Bytes 18-21

STX Station RW Addr 1 Data 1 Addr 2 Data 2 …

Bytes (L-10) - (L-7)

Bytes (L-6) - (L-3)

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

Addr N Data N ETX Check-sum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to read (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 6-9: This is the first address to write data to. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 10-13: This is the data to write to the address specified by the previous 4 bytes. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 14 – (L-3): The remaining addresses and data to write to the HMI. Each address and data item must be 4 bytes long.

Byte (L-2): Always ETX (0x03).

Bytes L-1, L: Checksum, calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 – (L-2).

Reply

If the command is successful, the reply is

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5

ACK Station ‘R’, ‘W’

In the event of an error, the reply is

310

Page 313: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘R’, ‘W’ Err Code

311

Page 314: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

RC (Read Coils)

Request

This command reads up to 99 consecutive coils from the HMI’s ‘C’ memory area. The command is always 14 bytes long.

Byte 1 Bytes 2, 3 Bytes 4, 5 Bytes 6-9 Bytes 10, 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13, 14

1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes

STX Station RC Addr. No. of Items ETX Checksum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to read (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 6-9: This is the starting address to read from. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 10, 11: This the number of coils to read, up to 99. Must be 2 bytes long.

Byte 12: Always ETX (0x03)

Bytes 13, 14: The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12.

Example: Read 12 coils starting from address C100, from the HMI at Station 7. This will read coils C100 – C111.

Byte 1 Bytes 2,3 Bytes 4, 5 Bytes 6-9 Bytes 10, 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13, 14

STX 07 RC 0100 12 ETX 22

02 30,37 52,43 30,31,30,30 30,32 03 32,32

The checksum (bytes 13 and 14) is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 – 12.

30 + 37 + 52 + 43 + 30 + 31 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 32 + 03 = 222.

The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 22.

Reply

The reply length is: L = N + 8

Where N = the number of requested devices

312

Page 315: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

If the command is successful, the reply length will be at least 9 bytes, but could be as long as 107 bytes. It consists of the STX, followed by one byte for each requested device, then the ETX and Checksum.

Byte 1

Bytes 2,3

Bytes 4,5

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Bytes 5 - (L-4)

STX Station RC Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 – Data (N-1)

Byte (L-3)

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

Data N ETX Checksum

If the HMI contains the following data: 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

The the following data is returned:

STX ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘R’ ‘C’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’

02H 30H 37H 52H 43H 31H 30H 31H 31H 31H 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 30H

‘1’ ETX ‘4’ ‘6’

31H 03H 34H 36H

The values in each requested device are returned in Hex. The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 – (L-2).

In the event of an error, the reply is:

Byte 1 Byte 2,3 Byte 4,5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘R’, ‘C’ Err Code

313

Page 316: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

WC (Write Coils)

Request

This command writes up to 99 consecutive coils to the HMI’s ‘C’ memory area. The length of the command is:

L = N + 14

Where N = the number of requested devices.

The command will be at least 15 bytes long, but can be up to 113 bytes long. Byte

1 Bytes

2,3 Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10-11

Byte 12

Byte 13

Bytes 14 - (L-4)

STX Station WC Addr. No. of Items Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 – Data (N-1)

Byte (L-3)

Byte L-2

Byte L-1, L

Data N ETX Check-sum

Byte 1: Always STX (0x02)

Bytes 2, 3: The Station Number of the HMI to read (2 Hex digits)

Bytes 4, 5: The command to execute

Bytes 6-9: This is the starting address to write to. Must be 4 bytes long,

Bytes 10, 11: This the number of addresses to write. Must be 2 bytes long.

Bytes 12 – (L-3): The data to write. Up to 99 items, one Hex digit each.

Byte (L-2): Always ETX (0x03).

Bytes L-1, L: Checksum

Example: Write 5 bits starting from address C214 to the HMI at station 12. This will write to addresses C214 – C218.

Write the following data:

214 215 216 217 218

1 1 0 0 1

314

Page 317: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Byte 1

Bytes 2,3

Bytes 4, 5

Bytes 6-9

Bytes 10,11

Byte 12

Byte 13

Byte 14

Byte 15

Byte 16

Byte 17

Bytes 18, 19

STX 0C WC 0214 05 1 1 0 2F 0 1 ETX

02 30,43 57,43 30,32,31,34 30,35 31 31 30 30 31 32,46 03

The checksum (bytes 18 and 19) is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 – 17.

30 + 43+ 57 + 43 + 30 + 32 + 31 + 34 + 30 + 35 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 30 + 31 + 03 = 32F.

The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2F.

Reply

If the command is successful, the reply is:

Byte 1 Byte 2, 3 Byte 4,5

‘W’, ‘C’ ACK Station

In the event of an error, the reply is:

Byte 1 Byte 2, 3 Byte 4, 5 Byte 6

NAK Station ‘W’, ‘C’ Err Code

315

Page 318: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

316

Page 319: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

8.7 PowerView Unit Error Messages

Message Description Attach PLC Initiate communication with PLC. Attach Fail Suggest Reset PLC Cannot set-up communication with the PLC. Turn

PLC power off and restart. BCD Transfer Overflow An attempt was made to enter illegal data to a

BCD type register , such as entering 10000 to a 16 bit BCD register.

Erase Image Fail The compiled .eob file is too large to download to the PowerView unit. Try compressing the images attached to the project, save and recompile.

Invalid Window Number <n> A change screen command issued by either a Function Key or PLC control attempted to switch to an undefined screen. <n> denotes the undefined screen number.

MiniSecond Timer Full Out of system resources – contact Nematron Object Queue Full Out of system resources – contact Nematron PLC Data Block Queue Full The PLC device on a screen is divided into too

many blocks (more than 100). PLC no response * PV unit has lost communication with the PLC PLC response error* The PLC replied with an unexpected response

message, possibly caused by a read or write command. Check to see if the configured PLC device address is available.

Second Timer Full Out of system resources – contact Nematron System Severe Error* Out of memory – contact Nematron Text Index Out of Range: Font Style (nn)

The text string contains an illegal character that does not exist in the font table. <nn> denotes the illegal character code.

* Message can be customized by “System Message” part.

317

Page 320: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Index

.

.blb file.......................................................................................................................50, 52, 60

.cmp file...............................................................................................................................203

.eob FILE...............................................................................................................................20

.epj file.............................................................................................................................13, 38

.glb file...................................................................................................................................63

.slb file .............................................................................................................................50, 57

2 25p D-Female .....................................................................................................................224

9 9p D-Female .......................................................................................................................222 9p D-Male............................................................................................................................223

A AB DH-485............................................................................................................................25 AB Micrologix CPU..............................................................................................................234 AB SLC 503/504 .........................................................................................................230, 234 AB SLC500 CPUs...............................................................................................................236 AB SLC504 .........................................................................................................................236 ACK.............................................................................................................................298, 299 Add Bitmap............................................................................................................................60 Add BMP...............................................................................................................................53 Add button...........................................................................................................................167 address .........................................................................................................................19, 168 PLC .......................................................................................................................................19 Alarm...................................................................................................................................208 Alarm Bar ..............................................................................................................26, 159, 160 add ......................................................................................................................................159 assign..................................................................................................................................160 position................................................................................................................................160 Alarm Display ......................................................................................................149, 150, 177 assign..................................................................................................................................150 place....................................................................................................................................150 position................................................................................................................................150

318

Page 321: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Alarm Messages .................................................................................................................177

alignment.............................................................................................................................196

Assigned Security .................................................................................................................29

Changing.............................................................................................................................198

Backlight................................................................................27, 113, 116, 172, 173, 212, 220 Bad Communication Sequence...........................................................................................298

Alarm Scan..................................................................................................................177, 178 Alarm Scan list ............................................................................................149, 159, 177, 178

Allen Bradley I/O ...............................................................................................................236 Allen-Bradley SLC DF1 .......................................................................................229, 231, 233 Animation ....................................................................................................................143, 144 assign..................................................................................................................................144 controls........................................................................................................................143, 144 place....................................................................................................................................143 Application Mode...........................................................................................................21, 192 Switch....................................................................................................................................21 Arc.......................................................................................................................................182 Arrange Object ....................................................................................................................196 ASCII...................................................................................122, 123, 137, 138, 139, 140, 163 ASCII Data ..................................................................................................................139, 140 assign..................................................................................................................................139 place....................................................................................................................................139 position................................................................................................................................140 ASCII Input..................................................................................113, 116, 130, 137, 138, 216 assign..................................................................................................................................138 place....................................................................................................................................137 position................................................................................................................................138 Asian ...................................................................................................................................193

Attach Fail Suggest Reset PLC...........................................................................................317 Attach PLC ..........................................................................................................................317 Attribute dialog ........................................................................................37, 38, 169, 177, 195 Attributes .......................................................................................................38, 130, 134, 198

Attributes button ..................................................................................................................123

B

Bar Graph....................................................................................................................155, 156 assign..................................................................................................................................155

319

Page 322: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

control .................................................................................................................................155 place....................................................................................................................................155 Position ...............................................................................................................................156 Base Window ......................................................................................15, 16, 34, 35, 215, 216 controlling..............................................................................................................................34 Base Window ID..................................................................................................................215 Basic Checksum .........................................................................................................298, 299 Baud Rate ..219, 229, 231, 233, 235, 238, 241, 243, 245, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296 BCC.....................................................................................................................................299

Selecting ...............................................................................................................................52

Bits ..............................................................................................................129, 136, 168, 170

BCD.....................................110, 114, 120, 130, 136, 144, 149, 155, 157, 166, 214, 218, 317 BCD Transfer Overflow.......................................................................................................317 BIN ..............................................................................................................110, 149, 155, 157 Binary ..................................................................................109, 114, 120, 130, 134, 136, 144 Binary Code Decimal ..........................................................................................................109 BIT.......................................................................................................111, 112, 118, 119, 215 Bit Address..........................................................................................................................299 Bit Lamp......................................................................................................................107, 108 assign..................................................................................................................................107 controls................................................................................................................................107 place....................................................................................................................................107 Bit Write Operation..............................................................................................................299 Bitmap 18, 50, 52, 53, 60, 61, 62, 96, 107, 109, 111, 114, 118, 121, 122, 124, 130, 132, 142, 143, 144, 161, 186, 216 Adding...................................................................................................................................60 Save......................................................................................................................................53

Bitmap characteristics ...........................................................................................................18 Bitmap Library .................................................................................................................59, 60 Creating.................................................................................................................................60 Opening.................................................................................................................................60 Bitmap Library button ............................................................................................................50 Bitmap Library dialog ............................................................................................................59

Bits/Words...........................................................................................................................167 Blinking on State 0 ..............................................................................................................108

320

Page 323: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Block Capture checkbox .......................................................................................................99 BMP ............................................................................................17, 52, 53, 61, 138, 142, 144 editing....................................................................................................................................53 BMP file.................................................................................................................................61 BMP Library ..........................................................................................................................52 Bottom Limit ........................................................................................................................114 Break Time..................................................................................................................108, 116 Browse ................................................................................................................................203 BUSY ..................................................................................................................................225

C

Change Common Window ..................................................................................................125

Color....................................................................................................................................177

COM.......20, 21, 222, 229, 231, 233, 235, 238, 241, 243, 245, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296

Control Microsystems..........................................................................................................270

CBL-PV1 .............................................................................................................................226 CBL-PV1 Download Cable Configuration ...........................................................................224 CBL-PV2 .............................................................................................................................263

Change Window..........................................................................................................124, 172 Channel...............................................................................................................152, 153, 154 Character Code...................................................................................................................123 Chinese ...............................................................................................................................193 Circle/Ellipse .......................................................................................................................182 Close Window .....................................................................................................................126 CLR .....................................................................................................................................122

Color DSTN...........................................................................................................................13 Color Options ......................................................................................................................184 Color TFT ..............................................................................................................................13

set .........................................................................................................................................21 Common Window......................................................................................................15, 27, 34 Communication Connections ..............................................................................................222 Compressing .......................................................................................................................203 Condition .............................................................................................................................177 Content Box ..........................................................................................................................55 CONTROL DEVICE ....................................................................................................107, 114

Control Style Functions .......................................................................................................142

321

Page 324: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Controller Connectors .........................................................................................................222 Creating.................................................................................................................................13 CTS.....................................................................................................222, 243, 246, 249, 256

existing................................................................................................................................167

Decompile ...................................................................................................................203, 204

Delayed Communication Sequence....................................................................................298

Delta DVP ...........................................................................................................................241

Destination ..........................................................................................................................204

Device Address..114, 116, 229, 231, 233, 238, 241, 243, 248, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295

DH485 Port .........................................................................................................................236

D Data Bits.....229, 231, 233, 235, 238, 241, 243, 245, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296 Data Format ...............................................................................................110, 149, 155, 157 Data Input............................................................................................................................133 Data Monitor........................................................................................................................101 Data Transfer ................................................................................................26, 166, 167, 168 assign..................................................................................................................................168 create ..................................................................................................................................167

Data Transfer Object dialog ................................................................................................168 Database.............................................................................................................................216 Days....................................................................................................................................164 Dec......................................................................................................................................115 Decimal ...............................................................................................................................214

Decompile tool ....................................................................................................................204 Decompressing ...................................................................................................................203

Delete BMP...........................................................................................................................53 Delete button.......................................................................................................................167

Description ............................................................................................................................40 Attaching ...............................................................................................................................40

Destination Address ............................................................................................................167 Destination window ...............................................................................................................38

Device Name.......................................................................................................................297

Direct Window.....................................................................................................................173 Direct Windows .............................................................................................95, 129, 147, 148

322

Page 325: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

activates ..............................................................................................................................148 assign..................................................................................................................................148 number ........................................................................................................................147, 148 place....................................................................................................................................148 position................................................................................................................................148 DL240..................................................................253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268 DL440..........................................................................................................................253, 255 DLE .............................................................................................................................298, 299 Download ....................................................................................................................162, 163 Download Active .................................................................................................................162 Download Mode ..................................................................................................................192 DRAM..................................................................................................................................100 Draw......................................................................................................................................37 graphics.................................................................................................................................37 Draw menu............................................................................................................................37 Driver list .............................................................................................................................297 D-SUB .........................................................................................................................226, 227

E Edit ................................................................................................................................38, 198 Edit tool ...................................................................................................................37, 38, 198 Emulator Setting..................................................................................................................101 Emulator Setting window.......................................................................................................97 English ................................................................................................................................193 ENT .....................................................................................................................113, 116, 122 Entertron Industries.............................................................................................................270 EPSON ESC/P2..................................................................................................................220 ERROR ...............................................................................................................................225 Error Messages...................................................................................................................317 ESC.....................................................................................................................................122 ESC key ..............................................................................................................................213 European.............................................................................................................................193 Event .....................................................................................................27, 164, 165, 169, 170 Event Display ......................................................................................100, 164, 165, 169, 170 assign..................................................................................................................................164 create ..................................................................................................................................164 Event Log ............................................................................................................164, 169, 170

323

Page 326: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Event Log Messages...........................................................................................................169 Event Scan..........................................................................................................................164 Event Trig....................................................................................................................165, 169 Eventlog Database..............................................................................................................216 Extra No. ......................................................................................................................27, 220

F Facon FB.....................................................................................................................243, 245 Fast Select Task Bar button................................................................................................126 Fast Selection window ................................................................................34, 92, 94, 95, 122 choose...................................................................................................................................94 Creating.................................................................................................................................95 Fast Window .........................................................................................................................93 Fast Window dialog...............................................................................................................93 File menu ........................................................................................................................13, 19 Fix objects ...........................................................................................................................190 Fix/Variable .........................................................................................................................156 Font .............................................................................................................................134, 177 Font Alignment ....................................................................................................................134 Font Format.................................................................................................................129, 139 Font Style ............................................................................................................................317 Font Tab......................................................................................................129, 136, 137, 139 Form Feed...........................................................................................................................124 Prints ...................................................................................................................................124 Format.........................................................................................................................165, 166 Format Item.........................................................................................................................165 Frame................................................................................................................16, 28, 35, 183 Function Key .........................................................................................29, 122, 125, 126, 127

G GE90 RS-422......................................................................................................................247 General dialog.......................................................................................................................92 General Tab ..................................................................................................26, 107, 122, 220 General Tab Items .....109, 111, 114, 118, 120, 136, 137, 139, 141, 143, 145, 147, 149, 151, 155, 157, 159, 161, 164 General-Attribute...................................................................................................................18

324

Page 327: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

GND ...222, 223, 225, 226, 227, 236, 241, 243, 246, 247, 249, 250, 252, 254, 255, 256, 258, 260, 262, 265, 266, 267, 269, 271, 279, 280, 282, 285, 287, 289, 290, 291, 293, 294, 295, 296 Good Communication Sequence ........................................................................................298 Graphics..........................................................................................................................37, 39 Drawing .................................................................................................................................37 grayscale...............................................................................................................................13 Grid/Snap ............................................................................................................................190 Group ........................................................................................................................18, 62, 64 Adding ...................................................................................................................................64 Group / ungroup ..................................................................................................................11 Group Library ....................................................................................................62, 63, 64, 123 Creating.................................................................................................................................63 Opening.................................................................................................................................63 Group Library dialog..............................................................................................................62 Group Objects button ..........................................................................................................196 Grouped Object Attributes...................................................................................................198 Editing .................................................................................................................................198 GV5 Modbus .......................................................................................................................270

H Handles .................................................................................................................................37 Happen Date .......................................................................................................................165 Hexadecimal Codes ............................................................................................................299 HIGH ALARM......................................................................................................................169 High Limit ............................................................................................................................116 Hitachi EH-150 ....................................................................................................................248 HMI Adaptor ........................................................................................................................286 HMI project......................................................................................................97, 99, 100, 101 HMI-to-HMI Connections.....................................................................................................226 Masters/Slaves....................................................................................................................226 HostLink Protocol Communication ......................................................................................278 Hours...................................................................................................................................164

I IBM 3764R ..........................................................................................................................296 ID...........................................................................................................................................40 change ..................................................................................................................................40

325

Page 328: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

ID Numbers ...........................................................................................................................40 IDEC Micro3 .......................................................................................................................250 Image ..................................................................................................................................208 Inc Value .............................................................................................................................115 Indicator Tab .........................................................................................................................28 Indirect Addressing .............................................................................................................217 Indirect Window...........................................................................................145, 146, 170, 173 assign..................................................................................................................................146 place....................................................................................................................................146 position................................................................................................................................146 INIT .....................................................................................................................................225 Input ......................................................................................................................................50 Input High............................................................................................................................134 Input Low.....................................................................................................................131, 134 Interior .................................................................................................................................183 Internal RTC........................................................................................................................164 Interval ................................................................................................................................112 Invalid Window Number ......................................................................................................317 Invisible Keys ......................................................................................................................130

J JOG.............................................................................................................115, 116, 117, 120 JOG Delay...........................................................................................................................114 JOG FS-Window .................................................................................................................126 JOG Speed .........................................................................................................................114

K Keypad................................................................................................................122, 123, 213 Creating.......................................................................................................................122, 123

L label.........................................................................................................................54, 55, 185 input ......................................................................................................................................54 Label Tab ....................................................107, 109, 111, 114, 118, 120, 122, 141, 143, 161 Language ............................................................................................................................193 LB..........................................................................................................................................41 LB9010................................................................................................................................162 LB9011................................................................................................................................162

326

Page 329: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

LB9012................................................................................................................................162 LG Frame Editor..................................................................................................................256

Master .................................................................................................................215, 226, 227

libraries....................................................................................................17, 52, 53, 57, 59, 62 Attaching ...............................................................................................................................17 Library menu .........................................................................................................................17 Line .............................................................................................................................182, 183 Local Bit ........................................................................................................................41, 211 Local Memory......................................................................................................................210 Local Word ....................................................................................................41, 166, 211, 220 Local Word Usage.................................................................................................................29 Low Limit .............................................................................................................................114 Low/High .............................................................................................................................156 LW.................................................................................................................................41, 169 LW Address.................................................................................................................214, 218 LW9000...............................................................................................................161, 162, 163 LW9040.................................................................................................................................29 LW9042.................................................................................................................................30 LW9043.................................................................................................................................30 LW9044.......................................................................................................................112, 119

M mapping ..............................................................................................................273, 275, 283

Master/Slave ...................................................................................................................41, 96 Masters/Slaves....................................................................................................................226 Matsushita FP1 ...................................................................................................................259 Memory Map Protocol .........................................................................................................296 MemoryMap_Master ...........................................................................................................296 MemoryMap_Slave .............................................................................................................296 Message Board ...........................................................................................................122, 128 Message Queue..................................................................................................................100 Meter ...................................................................................................................124, 157, 158 assign..................................................................................................................................157 place....................................................................................................................................157 Position ...............................................................................................................................158 Micrologix CPUs..................................................................................................................233 MiniDIN .......................................................................................................229, 231, 233, 241

327

Page 330: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Minimize Window ................................................................................................................127 MiniSecond Timer Full ........................................................................................................317 Mitsubishi A2A ....................................................................................................................262 Mitsubishi FX2.....................................................................................................................264 Mitsubishi FX2n...................................................................................................................264 Mitsubishi FXon...................................................................................................................264 Modbus ...............................................................................................................................270 Modbus Micro RJ45 ............................................................................................................278 Modbus RTU.................................................................................................................50, 274 Modes ...........................................................................................................96, 101, 112, 119 Modicon Modbus.................................................................................................................270 Monitor Object.....................................................................................................................101 Moving Shape .....................................................................................................................141 assign..................................................................................................................................141 controls................................................................................................................................141 place....................................................................................................................................141 position........................................................................................................................141, 142 Ms_LB...................................................................................................................................41 Ms_LW..................................................................................................................................41 Ms_RB ..................................................................................................................................41 Ms_RW .................................................................................................................................41

NI_2.....................................................................................................................................131

Multi-State Switch ...............................................................................................120, 121, 122 assign..................................................................................................................................120 controls................................................................................................................................120 place....................................................................................................................................120 position................................................................................................................................121 MX.......................................................................................................................................256

N New Lib ..................................................................................................52, 53, 57, 60, 62, 63 new project............................................................................................................................13 Creating.................................................................................................................................13 New Window .............................................................................................................14, 33, 94 Creating...........................................................................................................................14, 33 NI_0.....................................................................................................................................131 NI_1.....................................................................................................................................131

328

Page 331: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Normal Window...............................................................................................................16, 35 Not Downloaded..................................................................................................................162 Not Uploading .....................................................................................................................162 Null Modem .........................................................................................................................227 Numeric Data ......................................................................................................................136 assign..................................................................................................................................136 place....................................................................................................................................136 position................................................................................................................................136 Numeric Input..............................................113, 116, 123, 129, 130, 131, 132, 163, 214, 216 Numeric Tab..........................................................................................................29, 129, 136

Selecting .............................................................................................................................195

Numerical Input .....................................................................................................................27

O object assignments .............................................................................................................208 Printing ................................................................................................................................208 Object ID .............................................................................................................................191 Object Information...............................................................................................................101 Object Queue ......................................................................................................................100 Object Queue Full ...............................................................................................................317 objects.........................................................................................................................195, 196 Aligning ...............................................................................................................................195 Arranging.............................................................................................................................196 Nudging...............................................................................................................................195 rotating ................................................................................................................................196 Scaling ................................................................................................................................195

Off-line Simulator ................................................................................................................207 OMRON CQM Series CPUs ...............................................................................................278 OMRON CQM/LK201..................................................................................................278, 280 Omron Host Link .................................................................................................................280 OMRON LK202 ...................................................................................................................278 On-line Simulator ..................................................................................................................19 Open Window................................................................................................14, 33, 37, 92, 94 Option menu........................................................................................................190, 191, 193

P Parity Bit .....229, 231, 233, 235, 238, 241, 243, 245, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 295, 296

329

Page 332: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Part..................................................................................................37, 38, 39, 40, 54, 55, 105 Adding.............................................................................................................................37, 38 place......................................................................................................................................38 Select ....................................................................................................................................39 Part ID.................................................................................................................................191 Part tool.................................................................................................................................38 Parts dialog ...........................................................................................................................39 Parts menu................................................................................................................37, 38, 39 Passwords.............................................................................................................................29 Pause checkbox..................................................................................................................101 PC Adaptor..........................................................................................................................286 Pen Color ............................................................................................................................214 Periodical JOG....................................................................................................................114 PLC ...................................................................................................20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 41, 50 address .................................................................................................................................22 connect..................................................................................................................................25 Entering.................................................................................................................................50 PLC Block Activity .................................................................................................................99 PLC Block Information ..........................................................................................................99 PLC Control.........................................................................................171, 172, 173, 215, 216 PLC Data Block Queue Full ................................................................................................317 PLC Device .........................................................................................................................283 PLC Monitor ........................................................................................................................100 PLC setting..........................................................................................................................272 PLC Setting 229, 233, 235, 243, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295 PLC Tab........................................................................................................................24, 219 PLCBlock Queue.................................................................................................................100 Polygon .......................................................................................................................182, 183 Popup window...............................................................................................................27, 126 Port..............................................................................................................................253, 255 PowerView ..............................................................................................15, 20, 21, 22, 25, 34 connect..................................................................................................................................20 PowerView Recipe Function ...............................................................................................162 Print - On Trig......................................................................................................................169 Print Action..........................................................................................................................124 Print Function ......................................................................................................................122

330

Page 333: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Print Screen ........................................................................................................................208 Print Text.............................................................................................................................124 Printer..................................................................................................................................224 Printer Port ..........................................................................................................................224 Profile ..........................................................................................................132, 133, 144, 187 adjust...........................................................................................................................132, 135 Profile Tab...........................................................................................................................195 Programming Port ...............................................................................................................223 project ...........................................................................................13, 17, 19, 20, 21, 204, 207 Decompiling ........................................................................................................................204 Deploying ..............................................................................................................................19 Documenting .......................................................................................................................207 PV-1040 ......................................................................................................................123, 224 PV-770 ........................................................................................................................123, 224

R Raw Data Display................................................................................................................129 RB .........................................................................................................................................41 RBI ........................................................................................................................................41 RD ...............................................................................................................................226, 227 RDS.....................................................................................................................................223 Read Address ....107, 109, 118, 120, 129, 136, 138, 139, 142, 144, 145, 147, 150, 156, 157, 164, 169, 172, 173 Read Address+1 .................................................................................................142, 144, 156 Read Address+2 .........................................................................................................142, 156 Read Data Assignment .......................................................................................................143 Read PLC Block Information...............................................................................................100 Read/Write ............................................................................................................................96 Real Time Clock..........................................................................................................164, 218 Received Data.....................................................................................................................222 Recipe .................................................................................................................161, 162, 163 Recipe download/upload.....................................................................................................211 Recipe Name ..............................................................................................................162, 163 Recipe Transfer...................................................................................................161, 162, 163 Recipe Words......................................................................................................................211 Rectangle ....................................................................................................................182, 183 Reserved Local Bits ............................................................................................................211

331

Page 334: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Reserved Local Words........................................................................................................214 Reserved Recipe Words ...................................................................................................218 Reserved Words/Bits ..........................................................................................................211 RJ45 Male ...................................................................................................................236, 270 RJ6 Male .............................................................................................................................253 RS-232.25, 222, 223, 226, 229, 230, 231, 233, 234, 235, 236, 238, 241, 243, 245, 248, 253, 256, 257, 259, 263, 270, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 290, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296 RS-232 Receive..................................................................................................................223 RS-232 Transmit .................................................................................................................223 RS-232/422.........................................................................................................................223 RS-422 ................................................................................................................261, 262, 278 RS-485...25, 50, 226, 236, 247, 250, 252, 255, 259, 261, 262, 265, 266, 267, 268, 278, 282, 285, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296 RS485 Receive ...................................................................................................................223 RS485 Transmit ..................................................................................................................223 RS-485/422.........................................................................................................................222 RTC.....................................................................................................................166, 218, 220 RTS.....................................222, 230, 234, 243, 246, 249, 254, 256, 271, 279, 287, 289, 290 RW ........................................................................................................41, 162, 219, 220, 221 RWI .......................................................................................................................................41 Rx................................................................................................................223, 234, 294, 295 RX ......243, 246, 249, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 271, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294, 295 RxD .....................................................................................................................222, 223, 241 RXD.....................................................................................................................253, 257, 271

S Saftronics ............................................................................................................................270 SCADAPack Series.............................................................................................................270 Scaling ................................................................................................................142, 151, 187 screens................................................................................................................................208 Printing................................................................................................................................208 Search.......................................................................................................................97, 98, 99 Second Timer Full ...............................................................................................................317 Security .....................................................................................................................16, 29, 35 Security Control...................................................................................................................221 Security Control checkbox ....................................................................................................29 Security Tab........................................................................................................................221

332

Page 335: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Select COM........................................................................................................................................8 Select BMP ...........................................................................................................................17 Select Lib .................................................................................................................52, 53, 57 Select tool ...........................................................................................................................198 Selection Bar...................................................................................................................35, 36 Sequence No. .....................................................................................................................165 Serial Port ...........................................................................................................................219 Set Bit..................................................................................................111, 112, 113, 119, 132 place....................................................................................................................................111 position................................................................................................................................111 Set Constant .......................................................................................................................114 Set Operating Mode Switch ................................................................................................256 Set Pen Color......................................................................................................................122 Set Pen Style ......................................................................................................................122 Set PLC Node ID.................................................................................................................292 Set Press.............................................................................................................................163 Set Style Functions .............................................................................111, 114, 118, 119, 121 Set Temp.....................................................................................................................162, 163 Set Time......................................................................................................................162, 163 Set Value.............................................................................................................................114 Set Word .....................................................................................................114, 115, 149, 161 assign..................................................................................................................................114 controls................................................................................................................................114 place....................................................................................................................................114 position................................................................................................................................114 SET WORD.........................................................................................................112, 119, 215 Shape................17, 18, 50, 51, 52, 58, 62, 129, 130, 132, 141, 142, 149, 151, 159, 188, 216 Adding ...................................................................................................................................58 Selecting ...................................................................................................................50, 51, 58 Shape Library..............................................................................................17, 50, 57, 58, 191 Creating.................................................................................................................................57 Opening.................................................................................................................................57 Shape Library dialog .............................................................................................................57 Shape No. .............................................................................................................................58 Shape Rect .........................................................................................................................144

333

Page 336: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

Shape Tab...................................107, 109, 111, 114, 118, 120, 122, 129, 137, 141, 143, 161 Siemens S7-200..........................................................................................................282, 285 Siemens S7-300..........................................................................................................286, 288 Signal Ground .....................................................................................................222, 223, 225 Simulate ........................................................................................................................20, 133 simulated HMI .......................................................................................................................97 Simulation ...................................................................................................9, 96, 97, 101, 102 Simulator .....................................................................................................................9, 20, 21 SIXNET ...............................................................................................................................270 SIXTRAK Gateways............................................................................................................270 Slave ...................................................................................................................215, 226, 227 Source Window.....................................................................................................................38 SPAN ..................................................................................................................155, 156, 157 Special Key Functions.........................................................................................................122 Stacked Objects ..................................................................................................................198 Editing .................................................................................................................................198 Start Pos .........................................................................................................................16, 34 State............................................................................................................................107, 108 State No. ...............................................................................................................................58 Station Number ...........................................................................................................286, 288 STB .....................................................................................................................................224 Stop Bits.....229, 231, 233, 235, 238, 241, 243, 245, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 264, 265, 268, 270, 272, 275, 278, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 288, 291, 292, 294, 295, 296 Style Tab.............................................................................................................................187 Sub Value............................................................................................................................115 Switch Style.........................................................................................................................120 System Bits .........................................................................................................................162 System Message.........................................................................................................175, 317 System Parameters.........................................................13, 92, 164, 171, 211, 219, 220, 221 Selecting ...............................................................................................................................13 System Parameters window..................................................................................................41 System Resource................................................................................................................100 System Severe Error...........................................................................................................317 System Words.....................................................................................................................162

T T/C ......................................................................................................................................212

334

Page 337: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

Table ...................................................................................................................................208 Taiwan.................................................................................................................................193 Task Button .......................................................................................................26, 92, 94, 211 TD ...............................................................................226, 227, 230, 234, 236, 286, 289, 290 Telemecanique TSX37/07...........................................................................................294, 295 Test Emulator mode............................................................................................................101 Text .....................................................................................................................................185 Text Data...............................................................................................................................39 Text Index Out.....................................................................................................................317 text size ...............................................................................................................................196 Changing.............................................................................................................................196 Timer/Counter .....................................................................................................................212 Title Bar.................................................................................................................................11 Toggle ...................................................................................................................................17 Toggle Switch..............................................................................................................118, 119 assign..................................................................................................................................118 controls................................................................................................................................118 place....................................................................................................................................118 position................................................................................................................................119 Tool menu .............................................................................................................................19 Toshiba T Series .................................................................................................................292 Toshiba T2 Linkport ............................................................................................................292 Touch Adjust ...........................................................................................................................8 Touch Indicator .....................................................................................................................28 Tracking ..................................................................................................................16, 35, 108 Transmitted Data.................................................................................................................222 Transparent...........................................................................................................................61 Treebar........................................................................................................................200, 201 TreeBar .................................................................................................................................35 Trend...........................................................................................................................124, 216 Trend Color .................................................................................................................152, 154 Trend Display ......................................................................................100, 151, 152, 153, 154 Trend Tab............................................................................................................................151 Trigger...................................................................................29, 129, 130, 131, 132, 137, 138 Trigger Address...........................................................................................129, 131, 132, 137 TX........................234, 243, 245, 246, 249, 253, 256, 257, 260, 271, 278, 280, 286, 288, 290

335

Page 338: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide DOC-IWS-637E

TxD......................................................................................................................222, 223, 241 TXD.....................................................................................................................253, 257, 271

U Unattach Lib ........................................................................................................................52 Underlay Window............................................................................................................16, 35 Undo....................................................................................................................................196 Ungroup Objects button ......................................................................................................196 Unitelway protocol.................................................................................................24, 294, 295 Update Information button.....................................................................................................99 Upload.....................................................................................................................................9 Upload Active ......................................................................................................................161 Upper Limit..........................................................................................................................115

V

ViewManager ..................................................................................................................8, 223

Window Selection dialog .......................................................................................................93

Variable Alarm.............................................................................................................155, 156 VersaTRAK RTUs...............................................................................................................270 VG5 Modbus Drive..............................................................................................................270 ViewBuilder .......................................................8, 9, 11, 17, 18, 20, 21, 29, 33, 41, 58, 92, 96 PowerView ..........................................................................................................................8, 9 program...................................................................................................................................8 ViewBuilder button ..................................................................................................................8 ViewBuilder Screen Editor Functions....................................................................................10 ViewBuilder window ..............................................................................................................35

ViewWindow..................................................................................................................96, 207 ViewWindow Utility..............................................................................................................207

W Window 95/98 .....................................................................................................................193 Window Attribute dialog ........................................................................................................93 Window Bar.............................................................................................................92, 93, 127 Window Copy menu ..............................................................................................................38 Window menu .................................................................................................................14, 33 Window No..................................................................................................................125, 200 Window properties ........................................................................................................37, 191 Modifying...............................................................................................................................37

336

Page 339: ViewBuilder User Guide - Davis Controls Ltd. · DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide ... 2.5.6 Sample Macros ... (DF1 Full Duplex Protocol)

DOC-IWS-637E Nematron ViewBuilder User Guide

337

Window Treebar..................................................................................................................200 windows ................................................................................................17, 33, 36, 37, 38, 200 Deleting .................................................................................................................................37 Designing ..............................................................................................................................17 Importing ...............................................................................................................................38 Opening.................................................................................................................................36 Word Address .....................................................................................................................298 Word Lamp..........................................................................................................................109 assign..................................................................................................................................109 controls................................................................................................................................109 place....................................................................................................................................109 position................................................................................................................................109 Word Write Operation .........................................................................................................298 write address.........................................................................41, 111, 114, 118, 121, 161, 164 WRITE ADDRESS ..............................................................................................................169 Write/Read ............................................................................................................................29

X XOR ....................................................................................................................................299

Z ZERO ..........................................................................................................................155, 157